Nec Np P401W Users Manual

NP-P501X, NP-P451X, NP-P451W, NP-P401W, NP-PE501X NP-P501X, NP-P451X, NP-P451W, NP-P401W, NP-PE501X

NEC NP-P501X Home Theater Screen User Manual 867306a2-e22d-4500-8c91-587b460531de NEC Home Theater Screen NP-P501X User Guide |

2015-05-18

: Nec Nec-Np-P401W-Users-Manual-727542 nec-np-p401w-users-manual-727542 nec pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 231 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Projector
P501X /P451X
P451W/P401W
PE501X
User’s Manual
The PE501X is not distributed in North America.
Model No.
NP-P501X, NP-P451X, NP-P451W, NP-P401W, NP-PE501X
Ver. 1/02/13
• Apple,Mac,MacOS,iMac,andMacBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.
• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista,InternetExplorer,.NETFramework,Excel,andPowerPointareeitheraregis-
teredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.
• IntelandIntelCorearetrademarksofIntelCorporationintheU.S.and/orothercountries.
• PowerPCisaregisteredtrademarkoftheInternationalBusinessMachinesCorporation.
• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.
• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.
• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMI
LicensingLLC.
• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandother
countries and areas.
• Wi-Fi®,Wi-FiAlliance®,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)®areregisteredtrademarksoftheWi-FiAlli-
ance.
• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation
• CRESTRONandROOMVIEWareregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectronics,Inc.intheUnitedStatesandother
countries.
• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarks
oftheirrespectiveholders.
• GPL/LGPLSoftwareLicenses
 TheproductincludessoftwarelicensedunderGNUGeneralPublicLicense(GPL),GNULesserGeneralPublic
License(LGPL),andothers.
 Formoreinformationoneachsoftware,see“readme.pdf”insidethe“aboutGPL&LGPL”folderonthesuppliedCD-
ROM.
NOTES
(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.
(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionable
points,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.
(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprotorothermattersdeemed
toresultfromusingtheProjector.
i
Important Information
Safety Cautions
Precautions
PleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.
CAUTION
Toturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.
Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasily
accessible.
CAUTION
TOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.
THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.
REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.
Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufcienttocauseelectrical
shock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.
Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthis
unithasbeenprovided.
Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.
WARNING:TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.
DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGS
CANBEFULLYINSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)
ThisClassBdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES-003.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,
Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.
CAUTION
Avoiddisplayingstationaryimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.
DoingsocanresultintheseimagesbeingtemporarilysustainedonthesurfaceoftheLCDpanel.
Ifthisshouldhappen,continuetouseyourprojector.Thestaticbackgroundfrompreviousimageswill
disappear.
Disposing of your used product
EU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicprod-
uctscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisincludes
projectorsandtheirelectricalaccessoriesorlamps.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowthe
guidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.
Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpus
reducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpactsuchasmercurycontainedinalamptothehumanhealth
andtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.
ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMember
States.
ii
Important Information
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:
Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCalifornia
tocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASHHANDSAFTERHANDLING.
RF Interference (for USA only)
WARNING
TheFederalCommunicationsCommissiondoesnotallowanymodicationsorchangestotheunitEXCEPTthose
speciedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernmentregu-
lationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywith
thelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovide
reasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,and
canradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycause
harmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurina
particularinstallation.
Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedby
turningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthe
followingmeasures:
• Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
• Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.
• Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
• Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.
ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(veAmps)fuseinstalledforusewith
thisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.
Important Safeguards
Thesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventreandshock.Pleasereadthem
carefullyandheedallwarnings.
Installation
•Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:
- on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
- nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.
- indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.
- inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.
- onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.
•Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:
- Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.
- Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
- Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.
- Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
iii
Important Information
WARNING
• Donotuseanyotherobjectthantheprojector’sslidinglenscovertocoverthelenswhiletheprojectorison.
 Doingsocancausetheobjecttogetextremelyhot,andpossiblyresultinginareordamageduetotheheat
emittedfromthelightoutput.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldlead
totheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.
Place the projector in a horizontal position
Thetiltangleoftheprojectorshouldnotexceed10degrees,norshouldtheprojectorbeinstalledinanywayother
thanthedesktopandceilingmount,otherwiselamplifecoulddecreasedramatically.
10°
Fire and Shock Precautions
• Ensurethatthereissufcientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyour
projector.Allowatleast4inches(10cm)ofspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.
• Donottrytotouchtheexhaustventontheleftfront(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhilethe
projectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.Partsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarily
heatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormal
projectoroperation.
 Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieve
anyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyour
projector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbya
qualiedservicepersonnel.
• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.
• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorre.
• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupply
tsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.
• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.
• Keepanyitemssuchasmagnifyingglassoutofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightbeingprojectedfromthe
lensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancause
unpredictableoutcomesuchasreorinjurytotheeyes.
• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent.
 Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheex-
haust.
• Donotsplashwaterovertheprojector.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorre.Iftheprojectorgetswet,turnoff
theprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualiedservicepersonnel.
iv
Important Information
• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorre.
- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.
- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.
- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.
- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.
- Donotheatthepowercord.
- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.
• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualiedservicepersonnelunder
thefollowingconditions:
- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.
- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.
- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.
- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.
- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.
• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.
• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.
• WhenusingaLANcable(onlymodelswiththeRJ-45LANport):
 Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.
CAUTION
• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footorhang-
ingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.
• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethe
softcasecouldbedamaged.
• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select
[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[HIGH].)
• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblink-
ingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
v
Important Information
Note for US Residents
Thelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.
Lamp Replacement
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
• Toreplacethelamp,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage160.
• Besuretoreplacethelampandlterwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE
LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER.]appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphas
reachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.
Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.
 Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.
A Lamp Characteristic
Theprojectorhasahigh-pressuremercurylampasalightsource.
Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelampon
andoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.
Theactuallamplifemayvarydependingupontheindividuallamp,theenvironmentalconditionsandusage.
CAUTION:
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroff
andthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glass
fragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.
About High Altitude mode
• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700meters
orhigher.
 Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprojectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesand
turnontheprojector.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]
cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcom-
ponentssuchasthelamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures:
Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenue
suchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-
tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.
[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market
EEE Yonetmeliğine Uygundur.
Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirecteldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreec-
tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirecteldofview.
vi
Important Information
Power management function
Theprojectorhaspowermanagementfunctions.Toreducepowerconsumption,thepowermanagementfunctions(1
and2)arefactorypresetasshownbelow.TocontroltheprojectorfromanexternaldeviceviaaLANorserialcable
connection,usetheon-screenmenutochangethesettingsfor1and2.
1. STANDBY MODE (Factory preset: POWER-SAVING)
To control the projector from an external device, select [NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE].
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],thefollowingconnectorsandfunctionswillnotwork:
 PCCONTROLport,MONITOROUTconnector,AUDIOOUTconnector,USB(PC)port,LANfunctions*,MailAlertfunction*,DDC/
CI(VirtualRemoteTool)
* PE501Xdoesnothavethisfunction.
2. AUTO POWER OFF (Factory preset: 30 minutes)
To control the projector from an external device, select [OFF] for [AUTO POWER OFF].
NOTE:
• When[0:30]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWEROFF],youcanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoffin30minutesifthereis
nosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.
vii
Table of Contents
Important Information ............................................................................................i
1. Introduction ...........................................................................................................1
❶What’sintheBox? ..........................................................................................................1
❷IntroductiontotheProjector ...........................................................................................2
CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ..................................................2
Featuresyou’llenjoy: ................................................................................................2
Aboutthisuser’s manual ...........................................................................................3
❸ Part NamesoftheProjector ...........................................................................................4
Front/Top ...................................................................................................................4
Rear ..........................................................................................................................5
TopFeatures .............................................................................................................6
TerminalPanelFeatures ...........................................................................................7
❹PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ................................................................................8
BatteryInstallation ....................................................................................................9
RemoteControlPrecautions .....................................................................................9
OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl .........................................................9
❺OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM .........................................10
OperatingEnvironment ...........................................................................................11
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) ...............................................13
❶FlowofProjectinganImage .........................................................................................13
❷ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ..............................................14
❸TurningontheProjector ...............................................................................................15
NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) .......................................16
❹SelectingaSource .......................................................................................................17
Selectingthecomputerorvideosource..................................................................17
❺AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ........................................................................19
Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) .............................20
Focus ......................................................................................................................21
Zoom .......................................................................................................................22
AdjusttheTiltFoot ..................................................................................................23
❻CorrectingKeystoneDistortion[KEYSTONE] ..............................................................24
❼OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ..................................................................26
AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust ...................................................................26
❽ TurningUporDownVolume .........................................................................................26
❾TurningofftheProjector ...............................................................................................27
❿AfterUse.......................................................................................................................28
3. Convenient Features ......................................................................................29
❶ TurningofftheImageandSound .................................................................................29
❷Freezing a Picture ........................................................................................................29
❸ EnlargingaPicture .......................................................................................................29
❹ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect .................................................30
UsingEcoMode[ECOMODE] ...............................................................................30
CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ..............................................31
❺ PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ..................................33
viii
Table of Contents
❻Using4-PointCornertoCorrectKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ....................36
Cornerstone ............................................................................................................36
❼OperatingYourComputer’sMouseFunctionsfromtheProjector’sRemoteControl
viatheUSBCable(RemoteMouseFunction) ........................................................39
❽ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviatheUSBCable
(USBDisplay) .........................................................................................................40
❾ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser(notsupportedbyPE501X) ......42
❿ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviaaNetwork
[NETWORKPROJECTOR](notsupportedbyPE501X) ........................................49
⓫UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputerviaaNetwork[REMOTE
DESKTOP](notsupportedbyPE501X) .................................................................53
⓬ConnectingYourMicrophone ........................................................................................58
4. Using the Viewer (not supported by PE501X) ...................................................59
❶WhatyoucandowiththeViewer ..................................................................................59
❷Preparingpresentation materials .................................................................................62
❸ProjectingimagesstoredinaUSBmemorydevice .....................................................63
StartingtheViewer ..................................................................................................63
ExitingtheViewer ...................................................................................................68
NamesandfunctionsofViewerscreen ...................................................................69
Vieweroptionsettings .............................................................................................74
❹Projectingdatafromsharedfolder ...............................................................................77
Connectingtheprojectortothesharedfolder ........................................................77
Disconnectingthesharedfolderfromtheprojector ................................................80
❺Projectingdatafrommediaserver................................................................................81
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer11 .......................................81
Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer12 .......................................83
Connectingtheprojectortothemediaserver .........................................................84
Disconnectingtheprojectorfromthemediaserver ................................................85
❻Restrictionsondisplayingles .....................................................................................86
SomerestrictionsonPowerPointles .....................................................................86
SomerestrictionsonExcelles ..............................................................................86
SomerestrictionsonPDFles ...............................................................................86
5. Using On-Screen Menu .................................................................................87
❶UsingtheMenus ...........................................................................................................87
❷ Menu Elements .............................................................................................................88
❸ListofMenuItems ........................................................................................................89
❹MenuDescriptions&Functions[SOURCE] .................................................................92
COMPUTER ...........................................................................................................92
HDMI1and2 ...........................................................................................................92
VIDEO .....................................................................................................................92
S-VIDEO .................................................................................................................92
VIEWER(notsupportedbyPE501X) .....................................................................92
NETWORK(notsupportedbyPE501X) .................................................................92
USBDISPLAY .........................................................................................................92
❺MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] ...................................................................93
[PICTURE] ..............................................................................................................93
ix
Table of Contents
[IMAGEOPTIONS] .................................................................................................96
[AUDIO] .................................................................................................................100
❻MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] ...................................................................101
[GENERAL] ...........................................................................................................101
[MENU] .................................................................................................................103
[INSTALLATION] ...................................................................................................105
[OPTIONS(1)] .......................................................................................................107
[OPTIONS(2)] .......................................................................................................110
❼MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .....................................................................113
[USAGETIME] ......................................................................................................113
[SOURCE(1)] ........................................................................................................114
[SOURCE(2)] ........................................................................................................114
[WIREDLAN](notsupportedbyPE501X) ...........................................................114
[WIRELESSLAN](notsupportedbyPE501X) .....................................................115
[VERSION(1)] .......................................................................................................115
[VERSION(2)](notsupportedbyPE501X) ...........................................................115
[OTHERS] .............................................................................................................116
❽MenuDescriptions&Functions[RESET] ...................................................................117
ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ..................................................................117
❾ApplicationMenu(notsupportedbyPE501X) ...........................................................118
IMAGEEXPRESSUTILITY ..................................................................................118
DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY ............................................................................118
NETWORKPROJECTOR .....................................................................................119
REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION ...................................................................119
NETWORKSETTINGS .........................................................................................120
TOOLS ..................................................................................................................136
6. Installation and Connections ..................................................................141
❶SettingUptheScreenandtheProjector ....................................................................141
SelectingaLocation..............................................................................................141
ThrowDistanceandScreenSize ..........................................................................143
❷MakingConnections ...................................................................................................145
ConnectingYourComputer ...................................................................................145
ConnectinganExternal Monitor ...........................................................................147
ConnectingYourDVDPlayerorOtherAVEquipment ...........................................148
ConnectingComponentInput ...............................................................................149
ConnectingHDMIInput.........................................................................................150
ConnectingtoaWiredLAN(notsupportedbyPE501X) ......................................151
ConnectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)(notsupportedby
PE501X)................................................................................................................152
AttachingtheOptionalCableCover(NP03CV) ....................................................155
7. Maintenance .....................................................................................................156
❶CleaningtheFilters.....................................................................................................156
❷CleaningtheLens.......................................................................................................159
❸CleaningtheCabinet ..................................................................................................159
❹ReplacingtheLampandtheFilters ............................................................................160
x
Table of Contents
8. User Supportware ..........................................................................................165
❶InstallingSoftwareProgram .......................................................................................165
InstallationforWindowssoftware ..........................................................................165
❷UsingtheComputerCable(VGA)toOperatetheProjector(VirtualRemoteTool) ....168
❸ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImageorVideofromtheProjectoroveraLAN
(ImageExpressUtilityLite)(notsupportedbyPE501X) ......................................173
StartingImageExpressUtilityLitefromaUSBMemoryorSDCard ...................178
❹ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolinImageExpress
UtilityLite)(notsupportedbyPE501X) .................................................................180
WhatyoucandowithGCT ...................................................................................180
ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GCT) ............................................................180
❺ ProjectingImagesfromtheProjectoroveraLAN(ImageExpressUtility2.0)(not
supportedbyPE501X) ..........................................................................................182
WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2.0 ...................................................182
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ........................................................................183
BasicOperationofImageExpressUtility2.0 ........................................................184
❻UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputeroveraLAN(DesktopControlUtility
1.0)(notsupportedbyPE501X) ...........................................................................193
WhatyoucandowithDesktopControlUtility1.0 .................................................193
ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ........................................................................193
Usingtheprojectortooperateyourcomputer’sdesktopscreen ...........................194
❼ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5) ........................202
9. Appendix ..............................................................................................................206
❶Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................................206
IndicatorMessages ...............................................................................................206
CommonProblems&Solutions ............................................................................207
Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. ...............................208
❷Specications .............................................................................................................209
❸CabinetDimensions ...................................................................................................211
❹PinAssignmentsofD-SubCOMPUTERInputConnector .........................................213
❺CompatibleInputSignalList .......................................................................................214
❻PCControlCodesandCableConnection ..................................................................215
❼ TroubleshootingCheckList .........................................................................................216
❽REGISTERYOURPROJECTOR!(for residents in the UnitedStates,Canada, and
Mexico) .................................................................................................................218
1
Projector
1. Introduction
❶ What’s in the Box?
Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.
Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.
Power cord
(US: 7N080236)
(EU: 7N080022)
Computer cable (VGA)
(7N520087)
NEC Projector CD-ROM
User’s manual (PDF) and the utility
software
(7N951901)
• ImportantInfomation(ForNorth
America: 7N8N3471) (For Other
countries than North America:
7N8N3471 and 7N8N3481)
• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorthAmer-
ica: 7N8N3491) (For Other countries
than North America: 7N8N3491 and
7N8N3501)
Remote control
(7N900926)
Batteries (AAA × 2)
Unlessotherwisedescribedintheuser’smanual,thedrawingsfortheprojectorcabinetshowexamplesoftheP501X.
For North America only
Limited warranty
For customers in Europe:
You will find our current valid
Guarantee Policy on our Web
Site:
www.nec-display-solutions.com
2
1. Introduction
❷ Introduction to the Projector
Thissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector
Thisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimages
upto300inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMaccomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,DVD
player,ordocumentcamera.
Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,
andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.
*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.
 Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetherisk
ofbodilyinjury.
 Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordance
withanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.
Features you’ll enjoy:
• Quickstart(3seconds*2),QuickPowerOff,DirectPowerOff
 3seconds*2afterturningonthepower,theprojectorisreadytodisplayPCorvideoimages.
 Theprojectorcanbeputawayimmediatelyaftertheprojectorispowereddown.Nocooldownperiodisrequired
aftertheprojectoristurnedofffromtheremotecontrolorcabinetcontrolpanel.
 Theprojectorhasafeaturecalled“DirectPowerOff”.Thisfeatureallowstheprojectortobeturnedoff(evenwhen
projectinganimage)byusingtheMainPowerSwitchordisconnectingtheACpowersupply.
 ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,useapowerstripequippedwithaswitchand
abreaker.
*2 Thequickstarttimeisonlywhen[STANDBYMODE]issetto[NORMAL]intheon-screenmessage.
• 0.21W(100-130VAC)/0.43W(200-240VAC)instandbyconditionwithenergysavingtechnology
 Selecting[POWER-SAVING]for[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenucanputtheprojectorinpower-savingmode
thatconsumesonly0.21W(100-130VAC)/0.43W(200-240VAC).Thewattageisatypicalvalue.
• CarbonMeter
 Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)andelectricitycostwhenthe
projector’s[ECOMODE]issetto[AUTOECO],[NORMAL],or[ECO].
 TheamountofCO2emissionreductionwillbedisplayedintheconrmationmessageatthetimeofpower-offand
intheINFOoftheon-screenmenu.
• Lamplifeupto6000hours*3
 UsinginEcoMode(ECO)allowsyoutoprolongtheprojector’slamplifeupto6000hours(upto4000hoursin
ECOMODEOFF).
*3 P501X/PE501X/P451W:6000hours(upto3500hoursinECOMODEOFF).
• TwoHDMIinputssupportsdigitalsignals
 ThetwoHDMIinputsprovideHDCPcompatibledigitalsignals.TheHDMIinputalsosupportsaudiosignal.
• 16Wbuilt-inspeakerforanintegratedaudiosolution
 Powerful16wattmonauralspeakerprovidesvolumeneedforlargerooms.
• MICInputprovided
 AMICinputjackforacommerciallyavailabledynamicmicrophoneisusefulforyourpresentationinaconference
room or lecture in a classroom.
• ThesuppliedremotecontrolallowsyoutoassignaCONTROLIDtotheprojector
 Multipleprojectorscanbeoperatedseparatelyandindependentlywiththesamesingleremotecontrolbyassigning
anIDnumbertoeachprojector.
3
1. Introduction
• Keystonecorrection
 Keystonevertical/horizontal/pincushionandcornerstonefeaturesallowsyoutocorrectalmostalldistortionsinthe
image.
• IntegratedRJ-45connectorforwirednetworkingcapabilityalongwithwirelessnetworkingcapabilities
 AnRJ-45connectorisstandard.AnoptionalUSBWirelessLANUnit(NP02LMseries)isrequiredforwirelessLAN
connection.(wirelessandwirednetworkcapabilityisnotsupportedbyPE501X)
• Softwareprograms(UserSupportware)containedinthesuppliedCD-ROM
 ThesuppliedNECProjectorincludesprograms:VirtualRemoteTool,ImageExpressUtilityLite(forWindows/Mac
OS),ImageExpressUtility2.0(forWindowsonly),DesktopControlUtility1.0(forWindowsonly),andPCControl
UtilityPro4(forWindows)/5(forMacOS).
• LAN-compatibleViewer(notsupportedbyPE501X)
 Theprojector’sbuilt-inViewerallowsyoutoviewimagesormovielesinthesharedfolderofyourPCconnected
toawiredorwirelessLAN.
* TheViewersupportstheMediaSharingfunctionofWindowsMediaPlayer11.(TheViewerfunctionisnot
supportedbyPE501X.)
• Audiotransfercapability(forWindowsonly)
 ImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendthecomputer’sscreenimageandaudiototheprojector.
* Audiotransfercapabilityisavailableonlywhenthecomputerconnectswiththeprojectorinpeer-to-peernet-
work.
* AudiotransfercapabilityisavailablewithUSBDisplayconnection.
• Streamingvideotransfercapability(forWindowsonly)
 ImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendstreamingvideofromthecomputertoasingleprojectoroverwired
orwirelessLANwithouttheneedofconnectingacomputercable.
• USBDisplay
 UsingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB2.0specications)toconnectthecomputerwith
theprojectorallowsyoutosendyourcomputerscreenimageandaudiototheprojectorwithouttheneedofa
traditionalcomputercable(VGA).
• AUTOPOWERONandAUTOPOWEROFFfeatures
 TheDIRECTPOWERON,AUTOPOWERON(COMP.),AUTOPOWEROFF,andOFFTIMERfeatureseliminate
theneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
• Preventingunauthorizeduseoftheprojector
 Enhancedsmartsecuritysettingsforkeywordprotection,cabinetcontrolpanellock,securityslot,andsecurity
chainopeningtohelppreventunauthorizedaccess,adjustmentsandtheftdeterrence.
• HighresolutionuptoWUXGA
 Highresolutiondisplay-uptoWUXGAcompatible,XGA(P501X/P451X/PE501X)/WXGA(P451W/P401W)native
resolution.
• CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatibility(notsupportedbyPE501X)
 TheprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedinthenetworktobeman-
agedandcontrolledfromacomputerorcontroller.
About this user’s manual
Thefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthersttime.Takeafewminutesnowto
reviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llnd
anoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.
4
1. Introduction
❸ Part Names of the Projector
Front/Top
Controls
(→ page 6)
Lens
Remote Sensor
(→ page 9)
IntakeVent/FilterCover
(→ page 158, 163)
Zoom Lever
(→ page 22)
Lens Cover
Focus Lever
(→ page 21)
Adjustable Tilt Foot
(→ page 23)
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
(→ page 23)
Exhaust Vent
Heated air is exhausted from here.
Lens Shift Dial (Vertical)
(→ page 20)
5
1. Introduction
Opening and closing the lens cover
Slidethelenscovertothelefttouncoverthelens.
Tocoverthelens,slidethelenscovertotheright.
NOTE:
• ThelenscoverworksinconjunctionwiththeAV-MUTEfunction.Closingthelenscoverwillturnofftheimageandsoundduring
normalprojectoroperation;openingitwillrestoretheimageandsound.
 Withthelenscoverclosedtheimageandsoundisturnedoff,howeverthelampisstilllit.Iftheprojectorstaysthiswayforabout
2hours,itwillturnoffautomatically.
• Donotpullthelenscoverwithexcessiveforceorapplystrongpressureineithertheupordowndirection.Doingsocancause
damagetothelenscoverslidingmechanism!
ACInput
Connect the supplied power cord’s
three-pin plug here, and plug the
other end into an active wall outlet.
(→ page 14)
Port Cover for Optional USB
Wireless LAN Unit*1
(not supported by PE501X)
When using the optional USB
Wireless LAN Unit, first remove
the cover. (→ page 152)
Terminal Panel (→ page 7)
MonauralSpeaker(16W)
Lamp Cover (→ page 161)
Rear Foot (→ page 23)
Rear
Built-in Security Slot ( )*2
Security chain opening
Attach an anti-theft device.
The security chain opening accepts
security wires or chains up to 0.18
inch/4.6mmindiameter.
*1 AlthoughthePE501XdoesnotsupportwirelessLAN,awirelessmark( )isshownonthecabinet.
*2 ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.
6
1. Introduction
Top Features
1/2
5
6
4
7
811
9
3
10
1. (POWER)Button
(→page15, 27)
2. POWER Indicator
(→page14, 15, 27, 206)
3. STATUSIndicator
(→page206)
4. LAMPIndicator
(→page160, 206)
5. ECOButton
(→page30)
6. SOURCEButton
(→page17)
7. AUTOADJ.Button
(→page26)
8. MENUButton
(→page87)
9. ▲▼◀▶/VolumeButtons◀▶/KeystoneButton▼
(→page24, 26)
10.ENTERButton
(→page87)
11.EXITButton
(→page87)
7
1. Introduction
Terminal Panel Features
1237465
119 810 14
12*
13*
1. COMPUTERIN/ComponentInputConnector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)
(→page145, 149)
2. AUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)
(→page145, 149)
3. HDMI1INConnector(TypeA)
(→page145, 150)
4. HDMI2INConnector(TypeA)
(→page145, 150)
5. USB(PC)Port(TypeB)
(→page39, 40, 145)
6. MONITOROUT(COMP.)Connector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)
(→page147)
7. AUDIOOUTMiniJack(StereoMini)
(→page147)
8. S-VIDEOINConnector(MiniDIN4Pin)
(→page148)
9. VIDEOINConnector(RCA)
(→page148)
10.VIDEO/S-VIDEOAUDIOINL/MONO,R(RCA)
(→page148)
11.MICInputJack(MonauralMini)
(→page58)
12.USBPort(TypeA)*
(→page63)
13.LANPort(RJ-45)*
(→page151)
14.PCCONTROL[PCCONTROL]Port(D-Sub9Pin)
(→page215)
 UsethisporttoconnectaPCorcontrolsystem.Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunica-
tionprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage215.
* TheLANPort(RJ-45)andUSBPort(TypeA)arenotprovidedonPE501X.
8
1. Introduction
❹ Part Names of the Remote Control
3
7
5
6
1
2
10
15
16
14
17
9
4
8
13
29
30
31
19
20
25
27
28
24
18
23
22
21
26
32
12
11
1. Infrared Transmitter
(→page9)
2. POWERONButton
(→page15)
3. POWEROFFButton
(→page27)
4,5,6.COMPUTER1/2/3Button
(→page17)
 (COMPUTER2/3buttonisnotavailable.)
7. AUTOADJ.Button
(→page26)
8. VIDEOButton
(→page17)
9. S-VIDEOButton
(→page17)
10.HDMIButton(→page17)
11.VIEWERButton(→page17, 63)
12.NETWORKButton(→page17)
13.USBDISPLAYButton(→page17)
14.IDSETButton
(→page106)
15.NumericKeypadButton/CLEARButton
(→page106)
16.FREEZEButton
(→page29)
17.AV-MUTEButton
(→page29)
18.MENUButton
(→page87)
19.EXITButton(→page87)
20.▲▼◀▶Button(→page87)
21.ENTERButton(→page87)
22.D-ZOOM(+)(–)Button
(→page29)
23.MOUSEL-CLICKButton*
(→page39)
24.MOUSER-CLICKButton*
(→page39)
25.PAGE▽/△Button
(→page39)
26.ECOButton(→page30)
27.KEYSTONEButton
(→page24)
28.PICTUREButton
(→page93, 95)
29.VOL.(+)(–)Button
(→page26)
30.ASPECTButton
(→page98)
31.FOCUS/ZOOMButton
 (notavailableonthisseriesofprojectors)
32.HELPButton
(→page113)
* TheMOUSEL-CLICKandMOUSER-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnectedwithyourcom-
puter.
9
1. Introduction
Remote Control Precautions
• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.
• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.
• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.
• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.
• Donotthrowbatteriesintore.
• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.
• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.
• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
30°
22feet/7m
22feet/7m
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
Remote control
22feet/7m
22feet/7m
• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabout22feet/7mandwithina60-degreeangleof
theremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.
• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfalls
onthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.
1Pressrmlyandslidethebattery
coveroff. 2Installnewbatteries(AAA).Ensure
thatyouhavethebatteries’polarity
(+/−)alignedcorrectly.
Battery Installation
3
Slipthecoverbackoverthebat-
teriesuntilitsnapsintoplace.Do
notmixdifferenttypesofbatteries
ornewandoldbatteries.
OPEN
10
1. Introduction
❺ Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROM
NamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms
Nameofsoftwareprogram Features
VirtualRemoteTool
(Windowsonly)
ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsourceselec-
tionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputerbyusingthesuppliedcomputercable
(VGA)andothers.(→page168)
ImageExpressUtilityLite • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtoprojectyourcomputer’sscreen,streaming
movie,orsoundfromthecomputerovertheUSBcable*orthewired/wireless
network.Thecomputercable(VGA)isnotrequired.(→page40, 173)
* StreamingmoviescannotbeplayedwithUSBDisplayconnection.Only
USBDisplayfunctionissupportedbyPE501X.
• ThissoftwareprogramcanbeusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsource
selectionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputer.
• TheGeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)andaudiofunctionallowsyoutocor-
rectdistortionofimagesprojectedonacurvedwall.(→page180)TheGCT
functionisnotavailableforstreamingvideo.
ImageExpressUtilityLitefor
MacOS
• Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtoprojectyourcomputer'sscreenoverthe
wired/wirelessnetwork.Thecomputercable(VGA)isnotrequired.(→page
40, 179)
• ThissoftwareprogramcanbeusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsource
selectionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputer.
* “Audiotransmission”,“USBDisplay”,and“GCT”functionsarenotsupported
byMac.
* ImageExpressUtilityLiteforMacOSisnotsupportedbyPE501X.
ImageExpressUtility2.0
(Windowsonly)
• Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendthescreensofyourpersonalcomput-
erstotheprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN(Meetingmode).
 Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtopersonalcomputers.
 When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandsavedto
thepersonalcomputers.Imagescanbesentfromapersonalcomputerto
notonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.
(→page182)
DesktopControlUtility1.0
(Windowsonly)
• Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatethedesktopscreenofapersonal
computerataremotelocationbyusingaprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN.
(→page193)
• DesktopControlUtility1.0isnotsupportedbyPE501X.
PCControlUtilityPro4
PCControlUtilityPro5(forMac
OS)
Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojectorfromthecomputer
whenthecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN(wiredorwire-
less).(→page202)
• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.
• PCControlUtilityPro5(forMacOS)isnotsupportedbyPE501X.
NOTE:
• ImageExpressUtilityLitedoesnotsupport"MeetingMode"inImageExpressUtility2.0includedwithourothermodels.
Downloadservice
Fortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:
URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
11
1. Introduction
Operating Environment
ThefollowingistheoperatingenvironmentforImageExpressUtilityLite.Fortheoperatingenvironmentofothersoft-
wareprogram,refertothehelpfunctionofeachsoftwareprogram.
[Windows]
SupportedOS Windows8(CoreEdition)
Windows8Pro
Windows8Enterprise
Windows7HomeBasic
Windows7HomePremium
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomeBasic
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
WindowsXPHomeEdition(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlater
WindowsXPProfessional(32-bitversion)ServicePack3orlater
• Windowspower-savingfunctionisnotsupported.
• Tousetheaudiotransfercapability,Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista
ServicePack1orlaterisrequired.
Processor • Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista
PentiumM1.2GHzequivalentorhigherrequired
Dualcore1.5GHzorhigherrecommended
• WindowsXP
PentiumM1.0GHzequivalentorhigherrequired
Dualcore1.0GHzorhigherrecommended
Memory • Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista
512MBormorerequired
1GBormorerecommended
• WindowsXP
256MBormorerequired
512MBormorerecommended
*Morememorymayberequiredto runadditionalapplications simultane-
ously.
Graphicprocessor • Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista
The“Graphics”score3.0 ormore of“WindowsExperienceIndex”recom-
mended.
Networkenvironment TCP/IP-compatiblewiredLANorwirelessLAN
* UseawirelessLANunitcomplyingwiththeWi-Fistandard.
* Audiotransfercapabilityrequires3Mbpsormorethroughput.
Resolution • Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista
SVGA(800×600)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
• WindowsXP
VGA(640×480)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
1024dots × 768 lines -1280 dots × 800 linesrecommended (P451W/
P401W)
ScreenColors HighColor(15bits,16bits)
TrueColor(24bits,32bits)(recommended)
• 256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.
12
1. Introduction
[Mac]
SupportedOS MacOSXv10.6,v10.7,v10.8
Processor(CPU) Intel®Core™Duoprocessor1.5GHzorhigherrequired
Intel®Core™2Duoprocessor1.6GHzorhigherrecommended
* PowerPC®isnotsupported
Memory 512MBorhigherrequired
Networkenvironment WiredorwirelessLANrequiredthatsupportsTCP/IP
* ThefollowingLANadaptersareveriedtoworkwithImageExpressUtility
Lite:
• WiredLANadapterbuiltintoMac
• WirelessLANadapterbuiltintoMac
• AppleUSBEthernetadapter
“EasyConnection”supportsonlywirelessLAN.
SupportedResolution SVGA(800×600)orhigherrequired
XGA(1024×768)recommended
(1024×768–1280×800recommendedforP451W/P401W)
SupportedScreenColors 16.70millioncolorsrequired
13
Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.
❶ Flow of Projecting an Image
Step 1
• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→page14)
Step 2
• Turningontheprojector(→page15)
Step 3
• Selectingasource(→page17)
Step 4
• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→page19)
• Correctingkeystonedistortion[KEYSTONE](→page24)
Step 5
• Adjustingapictureandsound
- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 26)
- Turning up or down volume (→ page 26)
Step 6
• Makingapresentation
Step 7
• Turningofftheprojector(→page27)
Step 8
• Afteruse(→page28)
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
14
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❷ Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord
1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.
This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “6.
InstallationandConnections”onpage145.
 Connectthecomputercable(VGA)betweentheprojector’sCOMPUTERINconnectorandthecomputer’sport
(mini D-Sub 15 Pin). Turn two thumb screws of both connectors to fix the computer cable (VGA).
2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.
 Firstconnectthesuppliedpowercord’sthree-pinplugtotheACINoftheprojector,andthenconnecttheother
plug of the supplied power cord in the wall outlet.
The projector’s power indicator will flash for a few seconds and then will light orange* (standby mode).
The STATUS indicator will also light green*.
 *Thiswillapplyforbothindicatorswhen[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].SeethePowerIndicator
section.(→ page 206)
COMPUTER IN
Makesurethattheprongsarefullyinsertedinto
boththeACINandthewalloutlet.
→ To wall outlet
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
15
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Standby Blinking PowerOn
Steady orange light Blinking blue light Steady blue light
❸ Turning on the Projector
1. Slidethelenscovertothelefttouncoverthelens.
2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet
or the POWER ON button on the remote control.
The POWER indicator will turn to blue and the projector
will become ready to use.
TIP:
• Whenthemessage“Projectorislocked!Enteryourpassword.”
isdisplayed,itmeansthatthe[SECURITY]featureisturnedon.
(→page33)
• When the ECO message is displayed, it means that [ON] is
selectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→page104)
• PressingbuttonssuchaspowerbuttonandMENUbuttonwill
makesound.Toturnoffthebeepsound,select[OFF]for[BEEP]
fromthemenu.(→page109)
After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer
or video source is turned on and that the lens cover is
open.
NOTE:Whennoinputsignalispresent,theno-signalguidanceis
displayed(factorymenusetting).
(→page206)
16
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)
Whenyourstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectone
ofthe29menulanguages.
Toselectamenulanguage,followthesesteps:
1. Use the ▲, ▼, ◀ or ▶buttontoselectoneofthe29
languagesfromthemenu.
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection.
Afterthis has beendone,youcan proceedto the menu
operation.
Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.
(→[LANGUAGE]onpage89 and 103)
NOTE:
• Whenturningoffthepowersupplyandthenbackonbyusingapowerstriporbreaker.
 Allowaminimumof1secondbetweenturningoffthemainpowersupplyandturningitbackonagain.
 Failingtodosocouldresultinnopowertotheprojector.(Therewillbenostand-byLED)
 Shouldthishappen,unplugthepowercordandplugitinagain.Turnonthemainpower.
• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
- Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditionthe
projectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocool
down.
- Whenthelampreachesitsendofusablelife,theprojectorwillnotturnon.Ifthishappens,replacethelamp.
- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.
Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→page105)
- Ifthelampfailstolight,andiftheSTATUSindicatorashesonandoffinacycleofsixtimes,waitafullminuteandthenturn
onthepower.
• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.
• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis
stabilized.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.
• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-
inganimageforsometimeandthentheprojectorwilldisplaytheimage.
17
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❹ Selecting a Source
Selecting the computer or video source
NOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.
DetectingtheSignalAutomatically
PresstheSOURCEbuttononce.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailable
inputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:
COMPUTER→HDMI1→HDMI2→VIDEO→S-VIDEO→VIEWER→
USBDISPLAY→COMPUTER→ ...
• WiththeSOURCEscreendisplayed,youcanpresstheSOURCE
buttonafewtimestoselecttheinputsource.
• TheViewerandNetworksourcesarenotsupportedbyPE501X.
TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.
UsingtheRemoteControl
PressanyoneoftheCOMPUTER1,HDMI,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,
NETWORK,orUSBDISPLAYbuttons.
NOTE: The HDMI button on the remote control will toggle between “HDMI1” and
“HDMI2”.
[P501X/P451X/P451W/P401W]
[PE501X]
18
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
SelectingDefaultSource
Youcansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayed
eachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼ but-
tonortheENTERbuttontoselect[GENERAL].
3.
Press the
▶
buttonfourtimestoselect[OPTIONS(2)].
4. Press the ▼buttonvetimestoselect[DEFAULTSOURCESE-
LECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.
(→ page 111)
5.
Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbutton.
6. PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimestoclosethemenu.
7. Restart the projector.
The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.
NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[NETWORK]willnotbeautomatically
selected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[NETWORK].
TIP:
• WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfroma
computerconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINinputwillpowerontheprojector
andsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
 ([AUTOPOWERON(COMP.)]→page111)
• OnWindows7,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetup
externaldisplayeasilyandquickly.
[P501X/P451X/P451W/P401W]
[PE501X]
19
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❺ Adjusting the Picture Size and Position
Usethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomleverandthefocuslevertoadjustthepicturesizeand
position.
Inthischapterdrawingsandcablesareomittedforclarity.
Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage
[Lensshift]
(→page20)
Adjustingthefocus
[Focuslever]
(→page21)
Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage
[Zoomlever]
(→page22)
Adjustingthethrowangle(theheightofanimage)
[Tiltfoot]*¹
(→page23)
Adjustingtheleftandrighttiltofanimage
[Rearfoot]
(→page23)
Adjustingtheverticaland horizontalkeystonecorrec-
tion
[Keystone]
(→page24)
NOTE*1:Adjustthethrowangle(theheightofanimage)whentheimagepositionishigherthanthelensshiftadjustablerange.
20
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)
Rotatethelensshiftdial.
Downward
Upward
Lens shift dial
NOTE:
Thelensshiftdialcannotberotatedbeyondthemaximumupwardordownwardshift.Forciblyrotatingmaycausedamagetothe
projector.
TIP:
Lensshiftcanbeadjustedwiththerangebelow.Ifyouwishtomoveuptheimagehigherthanthislimit,usethetiltfootofthe
projector.
Desktopfrontprojection
[P501X/P451X/PE501X]
[P451W/P401W]
Height of projected image
Height of projected image
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.5V)
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.6V)
21
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Ceilingfrontprojection
[P501X/P451X/PE501X]
[P451W/P401W]
Focus
UsetheFOCUSlevertoobtainthebestfocus.
Focus Lever
Height of projected
image
Height of projected
image
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.5V)
Vertical shift range (0 to 0.6V)
22
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Zoom
UsetheZOOMlevertoadjusttheimagesizeonthescreen.
Zoom Lever
23
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
2
1
3
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Adjustable Tilt
Foot Lever
Adjust the Tilt Foot
1.Liftthefrontedgeoftheprojector.
CAUTION:
DonottrytotouchtheventilationoutletduringTiltFootadjustment
asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoristurnedonandafterit
isturnedoff.
2.PushupandholdtheAdjustableTiltFootLeveronthefrontof
theprojectortoextendtheadjustabletiltfoot.
3.Lowerthefrontoftheprojectortothedesiredheight.
4.ReleasetheAdjustableTiltFootLevertolocktheAdjustabletilt
foot.
 Thetiltfootcanbeextendedupto1.6inch/40mm.
There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of
the projector.
Rotate the rear foot to the desired height in order to square the image
on the projection surface.
CAUTION:
• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.
 Misusessuchasusingthetiltfoottocarryorhang(fromthewallor
ceiling)theprojectorcancausedamagetotheprojector.
Adjustingtheleftandrighttiltofanimage[Rearfoot]
• Rotatetherearfoot.
 Therearfootcanbeextendedupto0.5inch/12mm.Rotatingtherear
foot allows the projector to be placed horizontally.
NOTE:
• Donotextendtherearfootbeyonditsheightlimit(0.5inch/12mm).Doingso
maycausetherearfoottocomeoutoftheprojector.
Rear foot
Up Down
24
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❻ Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE]
Whentheprojectorisnotexactlyperpendiculartothescreen,keystonedistortionoccurs.Toovercomeit,youcanuse
the“Keystone”function,adigitaltechnologythatcanadjustforkeystone-typedistortion,resultinginacrisp,square
image.
Thefollowingprocedureexplainshowtousethe[KEYSTONE]screenfromthemenutocorrecttrapezoidaldistor-
tions.
Whentheprojectorisplaceddiagonallytothescreen,
Whentheprojectorissetupatanangleinrelationtothescreen,adjusttheHorizontaloptionoftheKeystonemenu
sothatthetopandbottomofsidesoftheprojectedimageareparallel.
NOTE:
• Beforeperformingthehorizontalkeystonecorrection,setthelensshifttothepositionof0.5V(P501X/P451X/PE501X)/0.6V
(P451W/P401W).
1. Press the ▼ button on the projector cabinet.
The Keystone screen will be displayed on the screen.
• PresstheKEYSTONEbuttonwhenusingtheremotecontrol.
• SeepageforPINCUSHION.
• SeepageforCORNERSTONE.
• SeepageforRESET.
2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[VERTICAL]andthenusethe◀ or ▶
sothattheleftandrightsidesoftheprojectedimageareparal-
lel.
* Adjusttheverticalkeystonedistortion.
Projected area
Screen frame
3. Aligntheleft(orright)sideofthescreenwiththeleft(orright)
sideoftheprojectedimage.
• Usetheshortersideoftheprojectedimageasthebase.
• Intherightexample,usetheleftsideasthebase.
Align left side
25
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
4. Press the ▲buttontoselect[HORIZONTAL]andthenusethe◀
or ▶sothatthetopandbottomsidesoftheprojectedimageare
parallel.
• Adjustthehorizontalkeystonedistortion.
5. Repeatsteps2and4tocorrectkeystonedistortion.
6. AftercompletingKeystonecorrection,presstheEXITbutton.
The Keystone screen will disappear.
• ToperformKeystonecorrectionagain,pressthe▼ button to display
the Keystone screen and repeat above steps 1 to 6.
Toreturnthekeystoneadjustmentstodefault:
1. Press the ▼buttontoselect[RESET]andpresstheENTERbutton.
2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The adjustments will be reset.
All the adjustments for all the five items will be reset at the same time.
• TheKEYSTONEfeaturecancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectroni-
cally.
26
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❼ Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically
Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust
Optimizingacomputerimageautomatically.(COMPUTER)
PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.
Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthersttime.
[Poor picture]
[Normal picture]
NOTE:
Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.
• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]
manually.(→page96,97)
❽ Turning Up or Down Volume
Soundlevelfromthespeakercanbeadjusted.
TIP:Whennomenusappear,the◀and▶buttonsontheprojectorcabinetwork
asavolumecontrol.
NOTE:
• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththe◀or▶buttonwhenanimageisenlarged
byusingtheD-ZOOM(+)buttonorwhenthemenuisdisplayed.
• Volume control is not available with the ◀ or ▶ button when VIEWER is
used.
TIP:
• The[BEEP]soundvolumecannotbeadjusted.Toturnoffthe[BEEP]sound,
fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[BEEP]→[OFF].
• Volumecanbecontrolledfromthemenu([ADJUST]→[AUDIO])
Increasevolume
Decrease volume
27
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❾ Turning off the Projector
Toturnofftheprojector:
1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector
cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote con-
trol.
The confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the
(POWER)orthePOWEROFFbuttonagain.
The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby
mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will
light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
PowerOn
Steady blue light
Standby
Steady
orange light
CAUTION:
PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonorifthe
ACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.
Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.
NOTE:
• Whilethepowerindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.
• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.
• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosing
themenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.
28
2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
❿ After Use
Preparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.
1. Unplugthepowercord.
2. Disconnect any other cables.
• RemovetheUSBmemoryifitisinsertedintotheprojector.
3. Retractadjustabletiltfootifextended.
4. Slidethelenscovertotherighttocoverthelens.
29
❶ Turning off the Image and Sound
PresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimageandsoundforashortperiodoftime.
Pressagaintorestoretheimageandsound.
Theprojector’spower-savingfunctionwillwork10secondsaftertheimageisturned
off.
Asaresult,thelamppowerwillbereduced.
NOTE:
• Eventhoughtheimageisturnedoff,themenustillremainsonthescreen.
• SoundfromtheAUDIOOUTjack(Stereomini)canbeturnedoff.
• Evenwhenthepower-savingfunctionworks,thelamppowermayberestoredtoitsoriginal
leveltemporarily.
• Torestoretheimage,evenifyoupresstheAV-MUTEbuttonimmediatelyafterthestartofthe
power-savingfunction,thelampbrightnessmaynotberestoredtoitsoriginallevel.
❷ Freezing a Picture
PresstheFREEZEbuttontofreezeapicture.Pressagaintoresumemotion.
NOTE:
• Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingback.
• WithImageExpressUtilityincludingUSBDisplay,pressingtheFREEZEbuttonwilleliminate
soundtemporarilyduringdisplayoffreezedimage.
❸ Enlarging a Picture
Youcanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.
NOTE:
• Dependingontheinputsignal,themaximummagnicationmaybelessthanfourtimes,orthis
featureisnotavailable.
• ThisfeatureisnotavailablewithUSBDisplay.
Todoso:
1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.
To move the magnified image, use the ▲,▼,◀ or ▶ button.
3. Convenient Features
30
3. Convenient Features
❹ Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect
Using Eco Mode [ECO MODE]
TheECOMODE(NORMALandECO)increaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownon
CO2 emissions.
Fourbrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF],[AUTOECO],[NORMAL]and[ECO]modes.
[ECOMODE] Description StatusofLAMPindicator
[OFF] Thelampbrightnessis100%. Off
[AUTOECO] Lamppowerconsumptionwillbechangedbetween
[OFF]and [NORMAL] automatically accordingto
picturelevel
NOTE:Abrightgradation maybelessvisibledepending
ontheimage.
[NORMAL] Lamppowerconsumption.(approx.80%brightness
onP501X/P451W/PE501Xand approx.83% on
P451X/P401W)Thelamplifewillextendbylowering
thelamppower.
SteadyGreen
light
[ECO] Lamppowerconsumption.(approx.60%brightness
onP501X/P451W/PE501Xand approx.67% on
P451X/P401W)Thelamplifewillextendlongerthan
theoneonNORMALmodebycontrollingpowerap-
propriateforthelamp.Themaximumpowerbecomes
equivalenttothepowerinNORMAL.
Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:
1. PresstheECOButtonontheremotecontroltodisplay[ECOMODE]screen.
2. PresstheECObuttonagaintoselectamodeyouwish.
• EachtimetheECObuttonispressed,thechoiceswillbechanged:
OFF → AUTO ECO → NORMAL → ECO → OFF
TIP:
• TheleafsymbolatthebottomofthemenushowsthecurrentselectionofECOmode.
2. Press the ▲▼◀▶ button.
The area of the magnified image will be moved
3. PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.
Each time the D-ZOOM (−) button is pressed, the image is reduced.
NOTE:
• Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.
• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnication.
31
3. Convenient Features
NOTE:
• The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu.
 Select[SETUP]→[GENERAL]→[ECOMODE].
• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].
• Theprojectorisalwaysin[NORMAL]for90secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkinggreen.
Thelampconditionwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[ECOMODE]ischanged.
• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysno-signalguidance,ablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]will
automaticallyswitchto[ECO].
• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[OFF]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[ECOMODE]automaticallychangesto[NORMAL]
modetoprotecttheprojector.Whentheprojectorisin[NORMAL]mode,thepicturebrightnessdecreases.Whentheprojector
comesbacktonormaltemperature,the[ECOMODE]returnsto[OFF]mode.
Thermometersymbol[ ]indicatesthe[ECOMODE]isautomaticallysetto[NORMAL]modebecausetheinternaltemperature
istoohigh.
• Immediatelyafter[ECOMODE]ischangedfrom[ECO]tooneof[OFF],[AUTOECO],or[NORMAL],thelampbrightnessmay
decreasetemporarily.Thisisnotamalfunction.
Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]
Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]
issetto[AUTOECO],[NORMAL],or[ECO].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].
Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBON
SAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcan
checktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page113)
The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2emissionreductionbetweenthetimeof
changingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-
SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.
32
3. Convenient Features
TIP:
• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction.
 AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninAUTOECO/NORMAL/
ECOforECOMODE)×CO2conversionfactor.*WhentheimageisturnedoffwiththeAV-MUTEbuttonorwiththelenscover
closed,theamountofCO2emmissionreductionwillalsoincrease.
 *CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008
Edition”.
• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.
• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.
• Thefactorsfor[TOTALCOSTSAVINGS]canbechangedfromthemenu([CARBONCONVERT]and[CURRENCYCONVERT]).(→
page112)
• Thecurrencyunitfor[TOTALCOSTSAVINGS]canbechangedfromthemenu([CURRENCY]).(→page112)
33
3. Convenient Features
❺
Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]
AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeyword
isset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-
jectorcannotprojectanimage.
•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.
ToenabletheSecurityfunction:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2. Press the ▶buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe▼buttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[GEN-
ERAL].
3. Press the ▶buttontoselect[INSTALLATION].
4. Press the ▼buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.
5. Press the ▼buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[SECURITYKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.
6. Typeinacombinationofthefour▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.
 The[CONFIRMKEYWORD]screenwillbedisplayed.
34
3. Convenient Features
7. Typeinthesamecombinationof▲▼◀▶buttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 TheSECURITYfunctionhasbeenenabled.
Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:
1. Press the POWER button.
 Theprojectorwillbeturnedonanddisplayamessagetotheeffectthattheprojectorislocked.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.
NOTE:Thesecuritydisablemodeismaintaineduntilthemainpoweristurnedofforunpluggingthepowercord.
35
3. Convenient Features
TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:
1. Press the MENU button.
The menu will be displayed.
2.Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 TheOFF/ONmenuwillbedisplayed.
3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 TheSECURITYKEYWORDscreenwillbedisplayed.
4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Whenthecorrectkeywordisentered,theSECURITYfunctionwillbedisabled.
NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequest
code.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConrmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]
isarequestcode.
36
3. Convenient Features
❻ Using 4-Point Corner to Correct Keystone Distortion
[CORNERSTONE]
Usethe[CORNERSTONE]featuretocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleft
orrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.
Cornerstone
1. PresstheKEYSTONEbuttonwithnomenudisplayed.
The KEYSTONE screen will be displayed.
• PresstheKESTONEbuttonwhenusingtheremotecontrol.
• SeepageforPINCUSHION.
2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[CORNERSTONE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The drawing shows the upper left icon ( ) is selected.
The CORNERSTONE screen will be displayed.
3. Projectanimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheraster.
4. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.
Projected image
The drawing shows the upper right corner.
TIP:Ifyouareadjusting[KEYSTONEHORIZONTAL],[KEYSTONEVERTICAL],[PINCUSHIONLEFT/RIGHT],or[PINCUSHION
TOP/BOTTOM],the[CORNERSTONE]itemwillnotbeavailable.Ifthishappens,resetthe[KEYSTONE]adjustments.
5. Use the ▲▼◀▶ button to select one icon (▲)whichpointsinthedirectionyouwishtomovetheprojected
imageframe.
6. Press the ENTER button.
37
3. Convenient Features
7. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.
8. Press the ENTER button.
9. Use the ▲▼◀▶buttontoselectanothericonwhichpointsinthedirection.
 OntheCornerstoneadjustmentscreen,select[EXIT]orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrol.
The confirmation screen is displayed.
10
. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
ThiscompletestheCornerstonecorrection.
Selecting[CANCEL]willreturntotheadjustmentscreenwithoutsavingchanges(Step3).
Selecting[RESET]willreturntothefactorydefault.
Selecting[UNDO]willexitwithoutsavingchanges.
38
3. Convenient Features
Theadjustablerangesfor3DReformareasfollows:
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
CORNERSTONE Max.+/−30°approx. Max.+/−30°approx.
KEYSTONE
* Thefollowingareconditionsunderwhichthemaximumangleisachieved:
• Whenthelensshiftissettothecenter
 Whenthelensshiftisusedandyettheimageisnotdisplayedinthecenterofthescreen,theadjustablerange
willbeincreasedordecreased.
• Imageisprojectedinmaximumwidewiththezoom
NOTE:
• Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.
• IftheCornerstonescreenisunavailable(grayed),resetthecurrentcorrectiondata.TheCornerstonefunctionbecomesavail-
able.
• Therangeofkeystonecorrectionisnotthemaximumtiltangleofprojector.
NOTE:Using[KEYSTONE]correctioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.
39
3. Convenient Features
❼
Operating Your Computer’s Mouse Functions from the
Projector’s Remote Control via the USB Cable (Remote Mouse
Function)
Thebuilt-inremotemousefunctionenablesyoutooperateyourcomputer’smousefunctionsfromthesuppliedremote
controlwhentheprojectorisconnectedtoacomputerviaacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB
2.0specications).
TheRemoteMousefunctionworksfortheCOMPUTERinputwhilethecomputerscreenisdisplayed.
TheRemoteMousefunctionwillnotworkwhileyoufreezeormagnifyanimage.
- UsingtheUSBcabletoconnecttheprojectorandthecomputerwillalsostartUSBDisplayfunction.
USB cable (not supplied)
NOTE:
• AUSBcablemustsupporttheUSB2.0Specications.
• Themousefunctioncanbeusedwiththefollowingoperatingsystems:
 Windows8,Windows7,WindowsXP,orWindowsVista
• InSP2orolderversionofWindowsXP,ifthemousecursorwillnotmovecorrectly,dothefollowing:
 CleartheEnhancepointerprecisioncheckboxunderneaththemousespeedsliderintheMousePropertiesdialogbox[Pointer
Optionstab].
• Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingtheUSBcablebeforereconnectingitandviceversa.Thecomputermaynotidentify
theUSBcableifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapidintervals.
• ConnecttheprojectortothecomputerwithaUSBcableafterstartingthecomputer.Failuretodosomayfailtostartthecom-
puter.
Operatingyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrol
Youcanoperateyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrol.
PAGE ▽/△ Button ���������������������������scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint
on your computer�
▲▼◀▶ Buttons ������������������������������moves the mouse cursor on your computer�
MOUSE L-CLICK/ENTER Button ������works as the mouse left button�
MOUSE R-CLICK Button ������������������works as the mouse right button�
NOTE:
• Whenyouoperatethecomputerusingthe▲▼◀or▶buttonwiththemenudisplayed,boththemenuandthemousepointer
willbeaffected.Closethemenuandperformthemouseoperation.
TIP:YoucanchangethePointerspeedontheMousePropertiesdialogboxontheWindows.Formoreinformation,seetheuser
documentationoronlinehelpsuppliedwithyourcomputer.
40
3. Convenient Features
❽ Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the
Projector via the USB Cable (USB Display)
UsingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable(compatiblewithUSB2.0specications)toconnectthecomputerwiththe
projectorallowsyoutosendyourcomputerscreenimageandaudiototheprojectorfordisplaying.PowerOn/Offand
sourceselectionoftheprojectorcanbedonefromyourcomputerwithoutconnectingacomputercable(VGA).
NOTE:
• TomakeUSBDISPLAYavailableonWindowsXP,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege.
• USBDisplayusesfunctionsofImageExpressUtilityLitecontainedonNECProjectorCD-ROM(→page173).
 StartingUSBDisplay,however,willnotinstallImageExpressUtilityLiteonyourcomputer.ThisisbecauseUSBDisplayexecutes
theprojector’sprogramonly.
• WhenImageExpressUtilityLiteisinstalledtobothyourcomputerandtheprojector,theoneinstalledtoyourcomputeralways
startevenifitisolderversionthantheoneinstalledtotheprojector.
 Ifaudiotransfercapabilityandotherfeatureswillnotwork,tryuninstallingImageExpressUtilityLitefromyourcomputer.This
willallowyoutouseallthefeatures.
• USBDisplaywillnotworkin[POWER-SAVING]or[NETWORKSTANDBY]of[STANDBYMODE].(→page110)
• When[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[AUDIOSELECT]from[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)],thesoundfortheUSBDISPLAYsource
isoutputtotheprojectorspeaker.
1. Start the computer.
2. Connecttheprojector’spowercordtothewalloutletandputtheprojectorintostandbycondition.
• Opentheprojector’slenscover.
3. UsetheUSBcabletoconnectthecomputerwiththeprojector.
USB cable (not supplied)
→ To wall outlet
Power cord (supplied)
 Themessage“Theprojectorisinstandbymode.Connectit?”willbedisplayedonthecomputerscreen.
• ThecontrolwindowofImageExpressUtilityLitewillbedisplayedonthetopofthescreen.
NOTE: Depending on the computer setting, the “AutoPlay” window may be displayed when the
computerdetects theconnectionto theprojector.If thishappens,click the “StartUSBDisplay”
window.
41
3. Convenient Features
4. Click“Yes”.
 Theprojectorwillturnonandthemessage“Theprojectorisgettingready.Pleasewait.”willbedisplayedonthe
computer screen. This message will disappear in a few seconds.
5. Operatethecontrolwindow.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)(6)
(1) (Source) ����� Selects an input source of the projector�
(2) (Picture) ���� Turns on or off AV-MUTE (Picture mute), and turns on or off FREEZE (Freeze a picture)�
(3) (Sound) ����� Turns on or off AV-MUTE (Sound mute), play the sound and turns up or down the volume�
(4) (Others) ����� Uses “Update”, “HTTP Server”*, “Settings” and “Information”� (not supported by PE501X)
* The HTTP Server cannot be selected when a USB cable is connected�
(5) (Exit) ���������� Exit Image Express Utility Lite� You can also turn off the projector at the same time�
(6) (Help) ����������� Displays the help of Image Express Utility Lite�
42
3. Convenient Features
❾ Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP Browser (not
supported by PE501X)
Overview
TheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:
1. Settingforwired/wirelessnetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)
To use wireless LAN connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit is required. (→ page 152)
 Tousewired/wirelessLANconnection,connecttheprojectortothecomputerwithacommerciallyavailableLAN
cable. (→ page 151)
2. SettingAlertMail(ALERTMAIL)
 Whentheprojectorisconnectedtoawired/wirelessnetwork,lampreplacetimeorerrormessageswillbesentvia
e-mail.
3. Operatingtheprojector
 Poweron/off,selectinginput,volumecontrolandpictureadjustmentsarepossible.
4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON
Thisdeviceuses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesetting
methodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelplesandtheotherinformationprovided
inyoursoftware.
TwowaysofaccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionareavailable:
• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing
URL:
 http://<theprojector’sIPaddress>/index.html
• UseImageExpressUtilityLitecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].
NOTE:
• Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.
• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournet-
work.
 Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedin
rapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-
tor.
• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourweb
browser(orclearthecache).
• Thisdeviceuses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwill
varydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelplesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.
Preparation before Use
ConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page151)
Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthe
settingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeenset
willnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbe
reectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.
43
3. Convenient Features
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser
RegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-
jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressofthe
projectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorresponding
totheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”leofthecomputerbeingused.
Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetwork
settingbyspecifying
 http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingby
specifying
 http://192.168.73.1/index.html
fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.
PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.
ON ������������������������� Power is switched on�
OFF ������������������������ Power is switched off�
VOLUME:Thiscontrolsthevolumeoftheprojector.
▲ ��������������������������� Increases the volume adjustment value�
▼ ��������������������������� Decreases the volume adjustment value�
AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.
PICTURE ON ���������� Mutes the video�
PICTURE OFF ��������� Cancels the video muting�
SOUND ON ������������ Mutes the audio�
SOUND OFF ����������� Cancels the audio muting�
ALL ON ������������������ Mutes each of the video, and audio functions�
ALL OFF ����������������� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio functions�
44
3. Convenient Features
PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.
BRIGHTNESS ▲ ���� Increases the brightness adjustment value�
BRIGHTNESS ▼ ���� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�
CONTRAST ▲ �������� Increases the contrast adjustment value�
CONTRAST ▼ �������� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�
COLOR ▲ �������������� Increases the color adjustment value�
COLOR ▼ �������������� Decreases the color adjustment value�
HUE ▲ ������������������� Increases the hue adjustment value�
HUE ▼ ������������������� Decreases the hue adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ▲ ����� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�
SHARPNESS ▼ ����� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�
• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page
95)
SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.
COMPUTER ����������� Switches to the COMPUTER IN connector�
HDMI1 ������������������� Switches to the HDMI 1 IN connector�
HDMI2 ������������������� Switches to the HDMI 2 IN connector�
VIDEO �������������������� Switches to the VIDEO IN connector�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector�
VIEWER ����������������� Switches to the data on the USB memory device�
NETWORK ������������� Switches to a LAN signal�
USB DISPLAY �������� Switches to the USB Port (PC)�
PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.
LAMP LIFE REMAINING �����Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage�
LAMP HOURS USED �����������Displays how many hours the lamp has been used�
FILTER HOURS USED ���������Displays how many hours the filter has been used�
ERROR STATUS ������������������Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�
LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).
45
3. Convenient Features
NETWORK SETTINGS
•SETTINGS
WIRED or WIRELESS
SETTING SetforwiredLANorforwirelessLAN.
APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLANorwirelessLAN.
DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyour
DHCPserver.
DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetwork
administrator.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.
WINS SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen
[DHCP]isturnedon,thisoptionisnotavailable.
AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassignIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtothe
projector.
AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.
SettingforWIREDLAN
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.
DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection
SettingforWIRELESSLAN(theoptionalWirelessLANUnitrequired)
EASYCONNECTION ExecuteawirelessLANusingEASYCONNECTION.
SIMPLEACCESPOINT Settheprojectorforsimpleaccesspoint.
WPS UseWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetup™)tosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
NOTE:Usetheprojector’smenustomakeWPSconnectionsandchangetheWPS
prolesettings.
CHANNEL Selectachannel.Availablechannelsvarydependingonthecountryandregion.When
youselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],makesurethattheprojectorandyouraccesspoint
areonthesamechannel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojectorand
yourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
46
3. Convenient Features
PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwirelessLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE
2.
SSID Enteranidentier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcanbedoneonlywith
equipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyourwirelessLAN.
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.SelectanSSIDwhichyou
can access.
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE:Selectthisoptionwhencommunicatingwithoneormoreequip-
mentconnectedtothewirelessLANnetworkviaawirelessaccesspoint.
ADHOC:SelectthisoptionwhenusingthewirelessLANtodirectlycommunicatewith
acomputerinpeer-to-peermode.
SECURITYTYPE Turnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmission.Whenturnontheencryp-
tionmode,setWEPkeyorencryptedkey.
DISABLE Willnotturnontheencryptionfeature.Yourcommunicationsmay
bemonitoredbysomeone.
WEP64bit Uses64-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.
WEP 128 bit Uses128-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.Thisoptionwill
increaseprivacyandsecuritywhen compared to useof 64-bit
datalengthencryption.
WPA-PSKTKIP/WPA-PSKAES/
WPA2-PSKTKIP/WPA2-PSKAES/
WPA-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPAESEAP-TLS/
WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/
WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2
Theseoptionsparovidestrongersecurity
than WEP.
NOTE:
• TheWEPsettingsmustbethesameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointin
yourwirelessnetwork.
• WhenyouuseWEP,yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslowdown.
• OtherencryptionkeysthanWEP64bitandWEP128bitarenotavailablewhen[ADHOC]is
selectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
• Toinstalladigitalcerticate,usetheprojector’smenu.(→page125)
INDEX Selectencryptionkeywhenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITY
TYPE].
KEY Whenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITYTYPE]:
EnterWEPkey.
Select Characters(ASCII) Hexadecimaldigit(HEX)
WEP64bit Upto5characters Upto10characters
WEP 128 bit Upto13characters Upto26characters
Whenselecting[WPA PSK-TKIP], [WPA PSK-AES], [WPA2PSK-TKIP]or [WPA2
PSK-AES]:
Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
USERNAME SetausernameforWPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.
PASSWORD SetapasswordforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAP
v2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2.
47
3. Convenient Features
USEDIGITALCERTIFI-
CATE
SelectthisifyouuseadigitalcerticateforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-
EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAES
PEAP-MSCHAPv2.
•NAME
PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorsothatyourcomputercanidentifytheprojector.A
projectornamemustbe16charactersorless.
TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe
15 or less.
DOMAINNAME Enterthedomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainname
mustbe60charactersorless.
•ALERTMAIL
ALERTMAIL(English
only)
Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mail
whenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.
ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.
Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Pleasereplacethelampand
lters.
ProjectorName:NECProjector
LampHoursUsed:100[H]
SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.
SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.
RECIPIENT’SADDRESS
1,2,3
Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.
TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornot
NOTE:
• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetwork
settingsarecorrect.
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthis
happen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.
SAVE Clickthisbuttontoreecttheabovesettings.
48
3. Convenient Features
•NETWORKSERVICE
PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforget
yourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.
HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.
AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetwork
supportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrec-
ognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.
*WhatisPJLink?
PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardproto-
colisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.
TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
CRESTRONROOMVIEWcompatibility
TheprojectorsupportsCRESTRONROOMVIEW,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedinthenetworktobemanaged
andcontrolledfromacomputeroracontroller.
Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com
<SettingProcedure>
AccesstotheHTTPserverfunction,andmakenecessarysettingsfor[CRESTRON]in[NETWORKSETTINGS].
•ROOMVIEWformanagingfromthecomputer.
DISABLE DisablesROOMVIEW.
ENABLE EnablesROOMVIEW.
•CRESTRONCONTROLformanagingfromthecontroller.
DISABLE DisablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
ENABLE EnablesCRESTRONCONTROL.
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCRESTRONSERVER.
IPID SetyourIPIDofCRESTRONSERVER.
TIP:TheCRESTRONsettingsarerequiredonlyforusewithCRESTRONROOMVIEW.
Formoreinformation,visithttp://www.crestron.com
•INFORMATION
WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.
WIRELESSLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwirelessLANconnection.
UPDATE Reectsettingswhentheyarechanged.
49
3. Convenient Features
❿ Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the
Projector via a Network [NETWORK PROJECTOR] (not
supported by PE501X)
ByselectingtheprojectorconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatofyourPC,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.Thereisnoneedofconnectionusingthecomputercable(VGA).
Operation Environment
ApplicableOS Windows8Pro
Windows8Enterprise
Windows7Professional
Windows7Ultimate
Windows7Enterprise
WindowsVistaHomePremium
WindowsVistaBusiness
WindowsVistaUltimate
WindowsVistaEnterprise
Hardwarespecications ThespecicationsrecommendedbyMicrosoftastheoperationenvironmentfor
Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVistashouldbesatised.
NetworkEnvironment WiredLANorwirelessLANenvironmentthatsupportsTCP/IPisrequired.
Screencolor HighColor(16bits)
TrueColor(24bitsand32bits)
*Settingwith256colorsorlessisnotavailable.
SettingtheProjectortoNetworkProjectorInputMode
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
APPLICATIONMENUscreenwillbedisplayed.Gotostep3.
50
3. Convenient Features
2. PresstheSELECT▼ or ▲buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Inthescreen,the[APPLICATIONMENU]menuisdisplayed.
3. Fromthe[APPLICATIONMENU]menu,select[NETWORKPROJECTOR].
 The[PROJECTORNAME/DISPLAYRESOLUTION/PASSWORD/URL]willbedisplayed.
51
3. Convenient Features
ProjectingtheImagewithNetworkProjector
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[AllPrograms].
3. Click[Accessories].
4. Click[ConnecttoaNetworkProjector].
 Whenthe[PermissionConnecttoaNetworkProjector]windowappears,click[Yes.].
 The“ConnecttoaNetworkProjector”windowappears.
5. Click[→Searchforaprojector(recommended)].
 Inthe“Availableprojectors”box,“P501Series”isdisplayed.
6. Click[P501Series].
 Themessage“Enterthepasswordfortheprojectorthatyouselected.”isdisplayedatthebottomofthewindow.
52
3. Convenient Features
7. Inputthepasswordtothepasswordinputboxdisplayedbytheoperationatstep3onpage50.
8. Click[Connect].
 ThenetworkprojectorfunctionworksandthescreenofWindows7isprojectedfromtheprojector.
• Iftheresolutionofyourcomputer’sscreenisdifferentfromtheprojector’sscreenresolution,theNETWORK
PROJECTORfunctionmaynotwork.Ifthishappens,changetheresolutionofthecomputer’sscreentolower
resolution than the one displayed at Step 3 on page 50.
NOTE:Whenthenetworkprojectorfunctionworks,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopchangestosolidcolor.Whenthenetwork
projectorfunctionisstopped,theoriginalbackgroundcolorisrestored.
Reference:IftheprojectorcannotbefoundatStep5,click[→Entertheprojectoraddress].Then,inputthe“Networkaddress”
(Inputexample:http://10.32.97.61/lan)and“Projectorpassword”(Inputexample:82291627)displayedinthescreenprojected
fromtheprojector.
ExitingtheNetworkProjectorOperation
1. Click[Projecting:P501Series]intheWindowsVistataskbar.
2. Click[Disconnect].
 TheNetworkProjectorfunctionisstopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
53
3. Convenient Features
⓫ Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network
[REMOTE DESKTOP] (not supported by PE501X)
• ByselectingthePCconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatoftheprojector,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected
tothescreenvianetwork.
 Then,byoperatingthekeyboard,youcanoperateWindows8,Windows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPonthe
PCconnectedwiththenetwork.
• WiththeRemoteDesktopfunction,youcanremotelyoperatethePCplacedatadistancefromtheprojector.
Meetingroom
Ofce
NOTE:
• The[REMOTEDESKTOP]functionwillworkonthefollowingWindowseditions.
 Windows8Pro,Windows8Enterprise,
 Windows7Professional,Windows7Ultimate,Windows7Enterprise,
 WindowsVistaHomePremium,WindowsVistaBusiness,WindowsVistaUltimate,WindowsVistaEnterprise,
 WindowsXPProfessionalwithServicePack3
 (Note)
• Inthisuser’smanualthisfeatureisdescribedusingWindows7asanexample.
• AkeyboardisrequiredtousetheRemoteDesktopfunction.
• TheRemoteDesktopfunctioncanbeoperatedwithakeyboard.Usingawirelessmousewithawirelesskeyboardismoreuseful
foroperating.
Useacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard,awirelessmouse,andaUSBwirelessreceiver.
UseacommerciallyavailableUSBkeyboardandUSBmouse.
• AUSBkeyboardwithabuilt-inUSBhubcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• AwirelesskeyboardormousethatsupportsBluetoothcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.
• WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBdevicesinthemarket.
Prepareacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard(USlayoutversion).
ConnecttheUSBwirelessreceivertotheUSBport(TypeA)oftheprojector.Makeallnecessarysettingsforyour
wirelesskeyboardandmouse.
USB
54
3. Convenient Features
SettingthepasswordtotheuseraccountofWindows7
TIP:Ifapasswordhasbeensetforanaccount,thesteps1to9canbeskipped.
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Addorremoveuseraccounts]displayedunder[UserAccounts].
4. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
5. Click[Administrator].
6. Click[Createapassword].
7. Inputthepasswordtothe[Newpassword]box.
8. InputthesamepasswordasthatatStep7tothe[Conrmnewpassword]box.
9. Click[Createapassword].
The Administrator is changed to [Password Protection].
SettingtheRemoteAccess
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[SystemandSecurity].
4. Click[Allowremoteaccess]displayedunder[System].
5. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]conrmationwindowappears,click[Continue].
The [System Properties] window appears.
6. Click[AllowconnectionsfromcomputersrunninganyversionofRemoteDesktop(lesssecure)]inthe
RemoteDesktopboxandclick[OK].
CheckingtheIPaddressonWindows7
1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.
2. Click[ControlPanel].
3. Click[Viewnetworkstatusandtasks]displayedunder[NetworkandInternet].
55
3. Convenient Features
4. Click[Viewstatus]displayedinblueontherightof[LocalAreaConnection]inthewindow.
The [Local Area Connection Status] window appears.
5. Click[Details...].
 Writedownthevaluefor“IPv4IPAddress”(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)displayed.
6. Click[Close].
7. Click[X]attheupperrightofthewindow.
 Thesystemgoesbacktothedesktop.
StartingtheRemoteDesktop
1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.
The input selection window appears.
Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The
APPLICATIONMENUscreenwillbedisplayed.Gotostep3.
56
3. Convenient Features
2. PresstheSELECT▼ or ▲buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[APPLICATIONMENU]menuwillbedisplayed.
3. Fromthe[APPLICATIONMENU]menu,usethewirelesskeyboardtoselect[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNEC-
TION].
 The[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION]windowappears.
4. OperatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheIPaddressofWindows7andclick[CONNECTION].
The log-on screen of Windows 7 is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.
5. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheuser’spasswordandpress“Enter”.
 Theremotedesktopfunctionisstarted.
 Windows7desktopisdisplayedinthescreenprojectedbytheprojector.
Log out the computer.
 UsethewirelesskeyboardconnectedtotheprojectortooperateWindows7.
NOTE:Whentheprojectionismadewiththeremotedesktopfunction,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopischangedtosolid
color.
57
3. Convenient Features
ExitingtheRemoteDesktop
1. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoclick[Start]fromthedesktopscreenprojectedbytheprojector.
2. Click[X]ontherightofthestartmenu.
 Theremotedesktopfunctionisstopped.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].
When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.
TIP:
Setting[OPTIONS]inREMOTEDESKTOP
Clicking[OPTIONS]displaysthe[PERFORMANCE]screen.
Makingsettingsto[OPTIONS]willallowyoutodisplaythedesktopbackground,ortoenablethewindowanimationfunctionduring
theRemoteDesktopoperation.However,doingthiswillcausethedisplay’sormouse’sresponsetoslowdown.
Ifthedisplay’sormouse’sresponseissloweddown,tryoneormoreofthefollowing:
DESKTOPBACKGROUND:Clearthecheckmarktodisplaythedesktopbackgroundinsolidcolor.
MENUANDWINDOWANIMATION:Clearthecheckmarktodisablemenuandwindowanimation.
THEMES:ClearthecheckmarknottouseThemes.
SHOWCONTENTSOFWINDOWWHILEDRAGGING:Clearthecheckmarktoshowonlythewindowpanewhile
dragging.
58
3. Convenient Features
⓬ Connecting Your Microphone
ConnectingacommerciallyavailabledynamicmicrophonetotheMICinputjackallowsyoutooutputyourmicsound
fromthebuilt-inspeaker.
SoundfromCOMPUTER,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,andHDMIaudioinputsorsoundofVIEWER/NETWORKinputwillbe
heardfromthespeakerwithyourmicrophonevoice.
Microphonesensitivitycanbeadjusted.Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION]→[MICGAIN].(→page
107)
NOTE:
• TheMICinputjackdoesnotsupportpluginpowermicrophones.
• IfthereisnosignalwheneitherHDMIinputisselected,soundoutputmaynotwork.
MIC
59
4. Using the Viewer (not supported by PE501X)
❶ What you can do with the Viewer
TheViewerfeatureallowsyoutoviewslidesormovielesstoredonaUSBmemoryontheprojector,orashared
folderinacomputerconnectedtothenetwork.
TheViewerhasthefollowingfeatures.
• WhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmemorythatstoresimagelesisinsertedintotheUSBport(TypeA)ofthe
projector,theViewerallowsyoutoviewtheimagelesontheUSBmemory.
 Evenifnocomputerisavailable,presentationscanbeconductedsimplywiththeprojector.
• Movielewithaudiocanbeplayedback.
• AMicrosoftPowerPoint/ExcelleorAdobePDFlecanbesimplyprojectedonthescreenwithoutconnectinga
computer.
• Imageandmovielesstoredinasharedfolderinacomputerconnectedtoanetworkcanbeprojected.
 Thecomputerwith“MediaSharing”ofWindowsMediaPlayer11turnedoncanbeusedasamediaserver.
Supportedgraphicformats
Format Filenameextension
JPEG .jpg,.jpe,.jpeg(CMYKisnotsupported.)
BMP .bmp(biteldnotsupported)
PNG .png(InterlacedPNGandαchannelPNGarenotsupported.)
GIF .gif(InterlacedGIF,transparationGIF,andanimationGIFarenotsupported.)
*Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon willbedisplayed.
NOTE:
Maximumnumberofpixelsofimagewhichcanbedisplayedare:
• BaselineJPEG:10000×10000
• ProgressiveJPEG:1280×1280
• GIF:1280×1280
• Others:4000×4000
• Somelessupportedbytheaboverequirementsmaynotbedisplayed.
Supportedmovieles
Filenameextension Videocompression/expansionmethod Audiocompression/expansionmethod
.mpg,.mpeg. MPEG2 MPEGAudioLayer2
MPEGAudioLayer3
.wmv VC-1/WMV9 WMA9Standard
.mp4 H.264/AVC AAC-LC
Playbackrequirements:
Resolution:320×240to1280×720
Videoframerate:upto30fps
Bitrate:upto15Mbps
Audiosamplingrate:upto48kHz
Channel:upto2chstereo
Audiobitrate:upto256Kbps
Max.lesize:upto2GB
60
4. Using the Viewer
NOTE:
• Movielesconvertedbyusingthevideo/audioformatwhichisnotsupportedbythisprojectorcannotbeplayedback.
 Inthiscase,therewillbenoicontoshowthatplaybackisnotpossible.
• FileswithDigitalRightsManagement(DRM)protectioncannotbeplayedback.
• Someofthemovielesthatmeettheaboverequirementsmaynotbeplayedback.Movielesmaynotbeplayedbackcorrectly
dependingonyournetworkenvironmentorthebitrateofyourle.
• WMVformatvideolewillbedisplayedinanaspectratioof1to1independentlyofitsoriginalaspectratio.
• Filesthatcanbeplayedbackonthemediaserveraregraphicsandmovieles.InWindowsMediaPlayer11(WindowsXP/
WindowsVista)mp4lescannotbeplayedback.
SupportedPDFles
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.pdf AdobeAcrobatPDF
NOTE:
• FontsnotembeddedinPDFmaynotbedisplayed
• FunctionsaddedtoPDFleaftercreatedwillnotworkordisplay.Functionsaddedarebookmarks,boxesinformtool,andnotes
willnotbedisplayed.
 AutoiporAutotransitionwillnotwork.
• SomePDFlesmaynotbedisplayed.
SupportedPowerPointles
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.ppt,.pptx MicrosoftPowerPoint97–2007
NOTE:
• Playablefonts,colors,fontornament,placement,objectinsertionoranimationarerestricted.
• SomeMicrosoftPowerPoint97–2007lesmaynotbedisplayed.
SupportedExcelles
Filenameextension Supportedleformat
.xls,.xlsx MicrosoftExcel97-2007
NOTE:
• Playablefonts,colors,fontornament,graphs,orgraphicsarerestricted.
• SomeMicrosoftExcel97-2007lesmaynotbedisplayed.
SupportedUSBmemorydevices
- BesuretouseaUSBmemorydeviceformattedwiththeFAT,exFAT,FAT32orFAT16lesystem.
 TheprojectordoesnotsupportNTFSformattedUSBmemory.
 IftheprojectordoesnotrecognizeyourUSBmemory,checkiftheformatissupported.
 ToformatyourUSBmemoryinyourcomputer,refertothedocumentorhelplethatcomeswithyourWin-
dows.
- WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBmemoriesinthemarket.
61
4. Using the Viewer
Noticesonsharedfolderandmediaserver
• Filesfromasharedfolderormediaservermaynotbeprojectedifsecurityorantivirussoftwareisinstalledonyour
computer.
• Openthefollowingrewallports:
- Mediaserver
Port number Protocol
1900 UDP
2869 TCP
10243 TCP
10280-10284 UDP
- Sharedfolder
Port number Protocol
137 UDP/TCP
138 UDP/TCP
139 UDP/TCP
445 UDP/TCP
• Setyourcomputerforsharingandsecuritytograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolderandsetyoursecurityor
antivirussoftwaretograntaccesstolesinthesharedfolder.Consultyournetworkadministratorformoreinforma-
tion.
• Movielesinthesharedfolderorthemediaservermaynotbeplayedbackcorrectlydependingonyournetwork
environmentorthebitrateofyourle.
NOTE:
DonotdisconnectbetweentheprojectorandyourcomputerbyremovingtheLANcableorturningofftheprojectorwhenaPow-
erPointleorPDFleisdisplayedfromasharedfolder.
DoingsowillmakeViewerinoperable.
NOTE
• ThefollowingoperationsbyusingthebuttonsontheprojectorarenotpossiblewhentheVIEWERscreensuchastheslidescreen
andthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.
- Keystonecorrectionbyusingthe▲or▼button
- AutoAdjustmentbyusingtheAUTOADJ.button
- Volumecontrolwiththe◀or▶button
• FreezingpicturebyusingtheFREEZE,ASPECT,orAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolisnotpossiblewhentheVIEWER
screensuchastheslidescreenandthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.
• Executing[RESET]→[ALLDATA]fromthemenuwillreturnthesettingsfortheViewertoolbartothefactorydefault.
62
4. Using the Viewer
❷ Preparing presentation materials
1. Createyourpresentationmaterialsandsavetheminasupportedleformattoyourcomputer.
• Seepage86 for supported file formats.
• MakesurethatPowerPointleisdisplayedontheViewerbeforegivingyourrealpresentation.
• WhencreatingaPDFle,embedyourfontsinyourPDFle.EmbeddingfontsrequiresAdobeAcrobat.This
cannot be done in Adobe Reader.
TIP:
•UsingPrintCommand
ExampleforfontembeddingusingPrintCommand.SeethehelpofAdobeAcrobatformoreinformation.
1. Select“Print”fromthe“File”menu.
2. Select“AdobePDF”from“Printername”andclickthe“Properties”but-
ton.
3. Clickthe“Edit”buttoninthe“AdobePDFSettings”tab.
4. ClickthefonttabintheEditwindowtoselectthefontembedwindow.
5. Placeacheckmarkfor“Embedallfonts”.
 Click“OK”toreturntothePrintwindow,andclick“OK”tostartcreatinga
PDF file.
2. Savealetoyourdrive.
To save a file to your USB memory:
Use the Windows Explore to copy the file to your USB memory.
To place a file in a shared folder you create in your computer, see page 77.
 Touse“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer11,seepage81.
63
4. Using the Viewer
❸ Projecting images stored in a USB memory device
ThissectionexplainsthebasicoperationoftheViewer.
TheexplanationprovidestheoperationalprocedurewhentheViewertoolbarissettothefactorydefault.
Preparation:BeforestartingtheViewer,storeimagestotheUSBmemoryusingyourcomputer.
Starting the Viewer
1. Turn on the projector. (→page15)
2. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportoftheprojec-
tor.
NOTE:
• DonotremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwhileit’sLED
ashes.Doingsomaycorruptthedata.
TIP:
YoucanaUSBmemoryinserttheprojectorwhenthedrivelistscreen
isdisplayed.
3. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselect[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display the
drive list screen.
 Anotherwaytoselect[VIEWER]istopresstheVIEWER
button on the remote control.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthedrivelistscreen,seepage69.
• Todisplaygraphicsinasharedfolder,seepage77;todisplaystill
imagesormovielesinamediaserver,seepage81.
USB
64
4. Using the Viewer
4. Press the ▶ button to select“USB1” and press the
ENTER button.
 The“USB1”thumbnailscreenwillbedisplayed.
TIP:
• Formoreinformationaboutthumbnailscreen,seepage71.
5. Use the ▲▼◀ or ▶ button to select an icon.
• The→ (arrow) symbol on the right indicates there are
more pages. pressing the PAGE ▽ (page down) button
will show the next page: pressing the PAGE △ (page up)
will show the previous page.
6. Press the ENTER button.
Operation varies depending on the selected file.
 •Stillimage
The selected slide will be displayed.
The ◀ or ▶ button can be used to select the next (right)
slide or the previous (left) slide in the thumbnail screen.
• PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythecontrolbar
with which is used to select or rotate an slide.(→ page
72)
65
4. Using the Viewer
 •Moviele
The movie file will start playing.
 Afternishingtheplayback,thescreenwillturntoblack.
PresstheEXITbuttontoreturntothethumbnailscreen.
• Pressing the ENTER button will display the movie’s
control bar with which you can pause or fastforward and
some other operations.
 •MicrosoftPowerPoint/Excelle
[PowerPoint]
The slide on the first page will be displayed.
Press ▶ to select the next slide; press ◀ to select the previ-
ous slide.
• Youcanalsousethe▼ or ▲ button to select a page. To
returntothethumbnailscreen,presstheEXITbutton.
[Excel]
The first sheet will be displayed.
Pressing the ▲, ▼, ◀, or ▶ button to scroll the sheet up,
down, left and right.
The PAGE ▼ or PAGE ▲ button will move to the next sheet
or the previous sheet.
Pressing the ENTER button will change the display ratio in
the sheet.
 Toreturntothethumbnailscreen,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
• Files with slideshow or animation effects may not be correctly
displayedontheViewer.
 See“SupportedPowerPointles”/“SupportedExcelles”onpage
60,86.
66
4. Using the Viewer
 •AdobePDFle
The first page will be displayed.
• ThePDFlewillllthewidthofthescreen.
Pressing the ▼ or ▲ button will scroll the screen down or
up.
The PAGE ▼ or PAGE ▲ button will move the screen one
page down or up.
 Toreturntothethumbnailscreen,presstheEXITbutton.
Pressing the ENTER button will change the display mode
between whole screen and part screen.
• Whenapassowordinputwindowisdisplayed,itmeans
that the PDF file is password-protected.
Pressing the ENTER button will show the software
keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter your
password.
Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. The PDF file
will be displayed.
• Formoreinformationonthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage
131.
NOTE:
BookmarksandnotesthatwereaddedafterPDFconversionwillnot
bedisplayed.
IffontswerenotembeddedatthetimeofPDFconversion,thosefonts
willnotbedisplayed.
TIP:
Ittakessometime(about30secondstotwominutes)todisplaya
largesizeleortoturnpagesofaPDFlethathasmanypages.
67
4. Using the Viewer
 •Indexle(extension:.idx)
• Index les, which is converted by usingViewer PPT
Converter 3.0, will appear in the Thumbnail screen.
Only folders and JPEG files converted by using
Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will appear in the Thumbnail
screen.
TIP:
• Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 can be downloaded from our
website.
URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
• Toselectslideshowofindexles,openthe[PRESENTA-
TION]folderintheDRIVELISTscreen.
However, index files will not appear. Only folders and
JPEG files will appear.
• UptofourindexfoldersinyourUSBandsharedfolder
are displayed. The four folders will be displayed in reverse
chronological order
• WhenyouinserttheUSBmemorydevicestoringindex
with the Viewer in operation, the content of the index files
will be displayed.
NOTE:
• Theplaymode(MANUAL/AUTO)forslidesofindexleworksin
thefollowingway:
 Incaseof[MANUAL]for[PLAYMODE]
 Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→[MANUAL],indexleswillbesetformanualplaybackinregard-
lessofwhether[INTERVAL]isset.
 Incaseof[AUTO]selectedfor[PLAYMODE]
 Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]
→ [AUTO], index les will be set for auto playback at intervals
speciedbyusing[INTERVAL].
 When,however,[-1]isselectedfor[INTERVAL],theplaymodewill
besetforautoplaybackaccordingtothesettingfor[OPTIONS]→
[SLIDESETTING]→[INTERVAL].
7. RemovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojector.
 Returntothedrivelistscreen.MakesurethattheLEDon
the USB memory is not flashing before removing the USB
memory.
NOTE:IfyouremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwithaslide
displayed,theprojectormaynotoperatecorrectly.Ifthishappens,
turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercord.Wait3minutes,then
connectthepowercord,andturnontheprojector.
USB
XXXX Motors
68
4. Using the Viewer
Exiting the Viewer
1. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselectasourceotherthan
[VIEWER].
A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select
screen.
A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display
another source.
• To exit theViewer using the remote control, select a
sourceotherthan[VIEWER].
69
4. Using the Viewer
Names and functions of Viewer screen
TheViewerhasthreescreens:Drivelistscreen,Thumbnailscreen,andSlidescreen.
•Drivelistscreen
Displaysalistofdrivesconnectedtotheprojector.
Menuoperation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythesubmenu.
OperationforDrivelistscreen
1. Press the ▶buttontomovethecursortothedrivelist.
(Use the ◀ or ▶ button to switch between the menu and the drive list.)
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select a type of drive; press the ◀ or ▶ button to select the drive connected to the
projector.
2. SelectthedriveandpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtothethumbnailscreenoftheselecteddrive.
Cursor (yellow) Cursor (yellow)
Menu Menu Scroll bar
[Drive list screen] [Thumbnail screen]
Folder icon
Path information
Driveinformation/Fileinformation
Menu guide Operation button guide
Control bar
* The operation for still image differs from that for movie.
[Slide screen]
70
4. Using the Viewer
Functions
Name Description
REFRESH Displaysadditionalmediaserversinthedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS OpenstheOPTIONSmenu.
SLIDESETTING Setsupslides.(→page74)
MOVIESETTING Setsupmovieles.(→page75)
AUTOPLAYSETTING Setsupautoplay.(→page75)
SHAREEDFOLDER Setsupasharedfolder.(→page77)
MEDIASERVER Setsupamediaserver.(→page81)
RETURN ClosestheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSETTING Switchestothesystemsettingmenu.SeewiredLAN,wirelessLAN,WPS,
network information,mouse, and keyboardin“9.Application Menu”. (→
page118)
USB Displays theicon fora USBmemory inserted into theUSBport of the
projector.
SHAREDFOLDER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingasharedfolder).
*Seepage77forsettingupforconnectingasharedfoleroftheprojector.
MEDIASERVER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-
nectingamediaserver).
*Seepage81forsettingupforconnectingamediaserveroftheprojector
PRESENTATION DisplaystheiconwhenaUSBmemoryorsharedfolerstoresindexles.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Driveinformation [Example]
USB1 314MBFREE/492MB
Displaysthedrive. Displaysfreespaceandcapcityof
adrive.(USBonly)
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
*Itisdisplayedinthree-digitnumber(roundingup)
NOTE:
WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistscreenorthumbnailscreenisnotdisplayed.Todisplayit,selectthe[RETURN]
iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
71
4. Using the Viewer
•Thumbnailscreen
Displaysalistoffolders,thumbnails,andiconsinthedriveselectedonthedrivelistscreen.
Menuoperation
• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton
todisplaythemenuorsettingscreen.
OperationforThumbnailscreen
1. Press the ▶ button to move the cursor to the thumbnail screen when the OPTIONS menu is not dis-
played.
2. Press the ▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectaleorfolder.
3. PresstheENTERbuttontostartslideshoworplaybackoftheselectedle.Selectingafolderwilldisplay
its thumbnail screen.
Functions
Name Description
UP Goestooneupperlevelmenu.
THUMBNAIL Switchestwodisplaysbetweenthumbnailandicon.
SORTSETTING Rearrangesfoldersorles.
DRIVELIST Returnstothedrivelistscreen.
OPTIONS ChangestotheOPTIONSmenu.
SYSTEMSET-
TING
Opensthesystemsettingmenu.
Scrollbar Thumbnailscreenwilldisplay12leswith4by3.Ifthethumbnailscreenhastwelveor
morelesorfolders,thescrollbarwillbedisplayedattherightside.UsingthePAGE
▼orPAGE▲buttonwillscrollthewholescreendownorup.
Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorle.
Thumbnailinformation [Example]
005.jpg 5/200 11/03/201013:25:12 502KB
Selectedfolder
nameorle
name
Numbersandorderof
lesinafolder(only
whenfolderselected)
Create/Changedate:
M/D/Y/H/M/B
Displaysle
capacity
Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.
Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.
TIP:
• Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon[?]willbedisplayed,
• Themaximumdisplayablenumberofimagesis300inthethumbnailscreenincludingthenumberoffolders.
• Ifalenameorpathofafolderislongerthanspecied,itwillbedisplayedwithcentercharactersorpathskipped.
 Example:“123456789.jpg”willbedisplayedin“123..789.jpg”.
72
4. Using the Viewer
•Slidescreen(stillimage/movie)
Playsaleselectedfromalistofthumbnailsoricons.
• ForoperatingaMicrosoftPowerPointleandAdobePDFle,seepage65, 66.
Controlbaroperation
• Thecontrolbarwillbedisplayedonlywhenastillimage(orindexle)andamovieleisselected.
• Thecontrolbarforstillimagesdiffersfromthatformovieles.
1. PressingtheENTERbuttoninSlidescreenwilldisplaythecontrolbaratthebottomofthescreen.
2. Use the ◀ or ▶buttontoselectaleandpresstheENTERbutton.
• Theselectedfunctionwillbeexecuted.
Functionsofstillimagecontrolbar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothepreviousimage
PLAY Playstheimage.Thisbuttonalsoisusedtostoporstartplayinganimage.
NEXT Goestothenextimage.
RIGHT Rotatestheimage90°clockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
LEFT Rotatestheimage90°counterclockwise.
• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.
SIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewith itsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stopsplayingslidesor slideshow, and closesthe control bar toreturn to thethumbnail
screen.
73
4. Using the Viewer
Functionsofmoviecontrolbar
Name Description
PREV Goesbacktothebeginningofamoviele.
• Goesbacktothebeginningofthepreviousmovieleifexecutedimmediatelyafterbeing
startedplaying.
FR Fast-rewindsamovieleforabout7seconds.
PLAY/PAUSE PLAY Playsamoviele.
PAUSE Stopsplayingamoviele.
FF Fast-forwardsamovieleforabout7seconds.
NEXT Goestothebeginningofanextmoviele.
TIME Displaysanelapsedtimeforplaybackorpause.
SIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplayable
maximumresolution.
ACTUAL
SIZE
Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.
• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.
END Stopsplayingamovie,andclosesthecontrolbartoreturntothethumbnailscreen.
74
4. Using the Viewer
Viewer option settings
•SLIDESETTING
Setsstillimagesorslides.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
PLAYMODE MANUAL Selectsmanualplay.
AUTO Selectsautoplay.
INTERVAL 5 - 300 seconds Specifies interval time when [AUTO] is selected for PLAY
MODE.
REPEAT Checkmark Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
TIP
• Toplayoneormoreslides,placethoselesintoafolder.
75
4. Using the Viewer
•MOVIESETTING
Setsthefunctionsforamoviele.
Name Options Description
SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-
ablemaximumresolution.
ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.
REPEAT OFF Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.
ONEREPEAT Repeatsoneleonly.
ALLREPEAT Repeatsalllesinthecurrentfolder.
TIP
• Turningon[REPEAT]willdisplayblackscreenduringintermissionbetweenmovies.
•AUTOPLAYSETTING
SetsautoplayforslideshowwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojector,orwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
Name Options Description
AUTOPLAY OFF —
PICTURE Playsarstfoundstillimageinadrive.
MOVIE Playsarstfoundmovieleinadrive.
PowerPoint PlaysarstfoundPowerPointleinadrive.
TIP
• AutoplaybehaviorisdifferentbetweenwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheUSBportoftheprojectorandwhen
[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].
• AutoplaystartsfortherstfoundlesupportingtheletypesetupforAutoPlay.Thelewillbesearchedinthedriverootor
lowerlevel.
• When[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE],thelastselectedlewillbeautomaticallyplayedifitisfound,orthelastselectedfolder
willbesearchedandtherstfoundlewillbeautomaticallyplayed.
 ToautomaticallyplayamovieleinaUSBmemory,storeonemovieleorchangeitslenamesothatitcanbesearchedrst.
76
4. Using the Viewer
•SORTSETTING
Setstheorderofdisplayingthumbnailsorslides.
Name Options Description
SORT NAME(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameinascendingorder.
NAME(ZYX..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybynameindescendingorder.
EXT.(ABC..) Displaysthelesalphabeticallybyextensioninascendingor-
der.
EXT.(ZYX..) Displaysthe les alphabeticallybyextensionin descending
order.
DATE(NEW) Displaysthelesinreversechronologicalorder.
DATE(OLD) Displaysthelesinchronologicalorder.
SIZE(BIG) Displaysthelesindescendingorderofitslesize.
SIZE(SMALL) Displaysthelesinascendingorderofitslesize.
77
4. Using the Viewer
❹ Projecting data from shared folder
LAN
Shared folder
Wireless LAN
Projector
Shared folder
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Placelestobeprojectedinasharedfolderandnotethefolder’spath.Memorizeorwritedownthe
pathforlateruse.
• Forsharingafolder,refertoyouruserguideorhelpleaccompaniedwithyourWindowscomputer.
• Useakeyboardtogiveanametothesharedfolderinalphanumericcharacters.
• Toconnectthesharedfolderbeyondthesubnet,set[WINSCONFIGURATION]in[NETWORKSETTINGS]from
the menu.
• Digitalsignature(SMBsignature)isnotsupported.
Connecting the projector to the shared folder
1. Press the VIEWER button on the remote control.
The drive list window will be displayed.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→ page
17)
78
4. Using the Viewer
2. Displaysthe[OPTIONS]menu.
Press the ▼ button to select the (OPTIONS)iconandpresstheENTERbutton.
• WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistwillnotbedisplayed.
3. Displaythe[SHAREDFOLDER]screen.
Press the ▼ button to select the (SHARED FOLDER) icon and press the ENETR button.
4. Selectafoldernumberandplacetoenableit.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button to a shared folder number and press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] , and then press
the ENTER button.
5. Enterthepath,username,andpasswordforthesharedfolder.
Press the ▼buttontoselectthe[SHAREDFOLDER]eld.Thesoftwarekeyboardwillbedisplayed.
 Forusingthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage131.
• Ifyourcomputerisnotpasswordprotected,enteringapasswordisnotrequired.
• Uptofoursharedfolderscanbeadded.
• Themaximumlengthofapathofthesharedfoldermustbe15alphanumericcharactersforcomputernameand
23 alphanumeric characters for folder name.
79
4. Using the Viewer
6. Exitthesetting.
Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.
This will close the [SHARED FOLDER] screen.
• Ifanerrormessageappear,yoursettingsarenotcorrect.Tryagain.
80
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector
• Disablethenumberofasharedfolderyouwishtodisconnect
Press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] and press the ENTER button to clear it.
NOTE:
• WhenaPowerPointleorPDFleisdisplayed,donotdisconnectyourLANcable.Ifdoingso,theViewerwillnotwork.
TIP:
• ConnectingsettingsforSharedfolder
 Settingsofuptofourfolderscanbesaved.
 Restartingtheprojectorwilldisplaysetting-savedsharedfoldersingreyfoldericononthedrivelistscreen.
 Selectingthegreyiconfolderwillskipentryforafolderpath.
• Failingtoconnectwithasharedfolderwilldisplaythefoldericonwith“x”mark.Ifthishappen,checkyourfoldersetting.
81
4. Using the Viewer
❺ Projecting data from media server
LAN
Media server
Media server
Wireless LAN
Media server
Projector
Preparation
Forprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.
Forcomputer:Prepareimagelesormovielestobeprojected,andsetup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer
11orWindowsMediaPlayer12.
NOTE:
• Boththeprojectorandthemediaservermustbeonthesamesubnet.Connectingtothemediaserverbeyondthesubnetisnot
possible.
• TypesofimagesandmovieswhichcanbesharedmayvarydependingonWindowsversion.
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer11.
2. Select“MediaSharing”from“Library”.
 The“MediaSharing”dialogboxwillbedisplayed.
82
4. Using the Viewer
3. Select“Sharemymedia”checkbox,andthenselectOK.
A list of accessible devices will be displayed.
4. Select“P501Series”andthen“Allow”.
 Acheckmarkwillbeaddedtothe“P501Series”icon.
• The“P501Series”isaprojectornamespeciedin[NETWORKSETTINGS].
5. Select“OK”.
 Thiswillmakepicturesandvideoin“Library”availablefromtheprojector.
83
4. Using the Viewer
Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 12
1. StartWindowsMediaPlayer12.
2. Select“Stream”,andthenselect“Automaticallyallowdevicestoplaymymedia”.
 The“AllowAllMediaDevices”windowswillbedisplayed.
3. Select“Automaticallyallowallcomputersandmediadevices”.
 Graphicsandmovielesin“Library”canbeusedfromtheprojector.
84
4. Using the Viewer
Connecting the projector to the media server
PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.
TheVIEWERwillstart.
• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→page
17)
• Thiswillstartsearchingforacomputerwith“mediasharing”enabledinthenetworkandaddittothe“Mediaserver”
ofthethumbnailscreen.
 Anotherwaytodothisistopointthecursorto“Mediaserver”andselect[REFRESH]fromthethumbnailmenu
andpresstheENTERbutton.
NOTE:
• Uptofouraccessiblemediaserverscanbeautomaticallysearchedanddisplayed.Thefthdeviceorlatercannotbedisplayed.
(→page63)
85
4. Using the Viewer
Disconnecting the projector from the media server
1. Display the OPTIONS menu.
Press the ▼buttontoselectthe[OPTIONS]iconandselecttheENTERbutton.
2. DisplaytheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.
Press the ▼buttontoselecttheMEDIASERVERiconandpresstheENTERbutton.
3. Disable the connection.
 PresstheENTERbuttontoclearthecheckmarktodisabletheconnection.
Press the ▼buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttontoclosetheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.
86
4. Using the Viewer
❻ Restrictions on displaying files
TheViewerallowsyoutogiveasimplieddisplayofaPowerPointleorPDFle.
Duetosimplieddisplay,however,actualdisplaymaybedifferentfromtheoneonyourcomputerapplicationpro-
gram.
Some restrictions on PowerPoint files
• Fontswillbeautomaticallyconvertedtothefontsinstalledintheprojector.Fontscanvaryinsizeorwidth,causing
layoutcorruption
 Somecharactersorfontsmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
 Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonanimation,selection,orhyperlink.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesMicrosoftPowerPoint97-2007formatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Some restrictions on Excel files
• Fontswillbeautomaticallyconvertedtothefontsinstalledintheprojector.Fontscanvaryinsizeorwidth,causing
layoutcorruption
 Somecharactersorfontsmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
• Therearesomerestrictionsongraphs,graphics,orimages.
• AfocuscursorincellA1cannotbemoved.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesMicrosoftExcel97-2007formatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
Some restrictions on PDF files
• FontsnotembeddedatthetimeofPDFcreationmaynotbedisplayed.
• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.
 Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonannotations,selection,form,orcolorspace.
• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer
• InsomecasesAdobeAcrobatformatlesmaynotbedisplayed.
87
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❶ Using the Menus
NOTE:Theon-screenmenumaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhileinterlacedmotionvideoimageisprojected.
1. PresstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythemenu.
NOTE:ThecommandssuchasENTER,EXIT,▲▼,◀▶inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.
2. Press the ◀▶buttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenu.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemortherst
tab.
4. Use the ▲▼buttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselecttheitemyouwanttoadjustor
set.
You can use the ◀▶buttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselectthetabyouwant.
5. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.
6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe▲▼◀▶ buttons on the remote control or
the projector cabinet.
Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.
7. Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-
torcabinettoquitthemenudisplay.
NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.
8. Press the MENU button to close the menu.
 Toreturntothepreviousmenu,presstheEXITbutton.
88
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❷ Menu Elements
Slide bar
Solid triangle
Tab
Radio button
High Altitude symbol
ECO mode symbol
Wireless symbol
Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:
Highlight �����������������������������Indicates the selected menu or item�
Solid triangle ����������������������Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active�
Tab ��������������������������������������Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�
Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�
Source ��������������������������������Indicates the currently selected source�
Off Timer remaining time ����Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�
Slide bar �����������������������������Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�
ECO mode symbol ��������������Indicates ECO MODE is set�
Key Lock symbol ����������������Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�
Thermometer symbol ���������Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [NORMAL] mode because the internal temperature is
too high�
High Altitude symbol ����������Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�
Wireless symbol �����������������Indicate the wireless LAN connection is enabled� (not supported by PE501X)
Source
Available buttons
Thermometer symbol
KeyLocksymbol
Off Timer remaining
time
Highlight
89
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❸ List of Menu Items
Somemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.
MenuItem Default Options
SOURCE
COMPUTER *
HDMI1 *
HDMI2 *
VIDEO *
S-VIDEO *
VIEWER(notsupportedbyPE501X) *
NETWORK(notsupportedbyPE501X) *
USBDISPLAY *
ADJUST
PICTURE
PRESET * 1–7
DETAILSETTINGS
GENERAL
REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,
sRGB,DICOMSIM.
GAMMA
CORRECTION*1DYNAMIC,NATURAL,BLACKDETAIL
SCREENSIZE*2* LARGE,MEDIUM,SMALL
COLOR
TEMPERATURE *5000,6500,7800,8500,9300,10500
DYNAMIC
CONTRAST *OFF,ON
IMAGEMODE * STILL,MOVIE
COLOR
ENHANCEMENT *OFF,ON
WHITEBALANCE
CONTRASTR 0
CONTRASTG 0
CONTRASTB 0
BRIGHTNESSR *3
BRIGHTNESSG *3
BRIGHTNESSB *3
CONTRAST 63
BRIGHTNESS 63
SHARPNESS 7
COLOR 31
HUE 31
RESET
IMAGE
OPTIONS
CLOCK *
PHASE *
HORIZONTAL *
VERTICAL *
OVERSCAN * AUTO,0[%],5[%],10[%]
ASPECTRATIO
*P501X/P451X/PE501X:AUTO,4:3,16:9,15:9,16:10,WIDE
ZOOM,NATIVE
*P451W/P401W:AUTO,4:3,16:9,15:9,16:10,LETTERBOX,
NATIVE
POSITION(NotavailableonP451W/
P401W) 0
AUDIO VOLUME 11
SETUP GENERAL
KEYSTONE 0
KEYSTONEHORIZONTAL,KEYSTONEVERTICAL,
PINCUSHIONLEFT/RIGHT,PINCUSHIONTOP/BOTTOM,
CORNERSTONE,RESET
WALLCOLOR OFF OFF,WHITEBOARD,BLACKBOARD,BLACKBOARD
(GRAY),LIGHTYELLOW,LIGHTGREEN,LIGHTBLUE,
SKYBLUE,LIGHTROSE,PINK
ECOMODE AUTOECO OFF,AUTOECO,NORMAL,ECO
CLOSEDCAPTION OFF OFF,CAPTION1,CAPTION2,CAPTION3,CAPTION4,
TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4
OFFTIMER OFF OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
ENGLISH,DEUTSCH,FRANÇAIS,ITALIANO,ESPAÑOL,
SVENSKA,DANSK,PORTUGUÊS,ČEŠTINA,MAGYAR,
POLSKI,NEDERLANDS,SUOMI,NORSK,TÜRKÇE,
ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKI, INDONESIA, РУССКИЙ,
БЪЛГАРСКИ, ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΆ, , हिन्दी, ไทย, , 简体中
文, 한국어, 日本語, 繁體中文
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
*3 Thedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesettingof[REFERENCE].
Basic menu items are indicated by shaded
area�
90
5. Using On-Screen Menu
MenuItem Default Options
SETUP
MENU
COLORSELECT COLOR COLOR,MONOCHROME
SOURCEDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
IDDISPLAY ON OFF,ON
ECOMESSAGE OFF OFF,ON
DISPLAYTIME AUTO45SEC MANUAL,AUTO5SEC,AUTO15SEC,AUTO45SEC
BACKGROUND BLUE BLUE,BLACK,LOGO
FILTERMESSAGE OFF OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H]
INSTALLATION
ORIENTATION DESKTOP
FRONT DESKTOPFRONT,CEILINGREAR,DESKTOPREAR,
CEILINGFRONT
CONTROLPANELLOCK OFF OFF,ON
SECURITY OFF OFF,ON
COMMUNICATIONSPEED 38400bps 4800bps,9600bps,19200bps,38400bps
REMOTESENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK,FRONT,BACK
CONTROLID
CONTROLID
NUMBER 11–254
CONTROLID OFF OFF,ON
TESTPATTERN
MICGAIN 2 0, 1, 2, 3
NETWORKSETTINGS
(notsupportedbyPE501X)
OPTIONS(1)
AUTOADJUST NORMAL OFF,NORMAL,FINE
FANMODE AUTO AUTO,HIGH,HIGHALTITUDE
SIGNALSELECT
COMPUTER RGB/
COMPONENT RGB/COMPONENT,RGB,COMPONENT
VIDEO AUTO AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
S-VIDEO AUTO AUTO,NTSC3.58,NTSC4.43,PAL,PAL-M,PAL-N,PAL60,
SECAM
WXGAMODE
P501X/P451X/
PE501X:OFF
P451W/P401W:
ON
OFF,ON
DEINTERLACE ON OFF,ON
HDMI
SETTINGS
HDMI1 VIDEOLEVEL AUTO AUTO,NORMAL,ENHANCED
HDMI2 VIDEOLEVEL AUTO AUTO,NORMAL,ENHANCED
AUDIO
SELECT
HDMI1 HDMI1 HDMI1,COMPUTER
HDMI2 HDMI2 HDMI2,COMPUTER
NETWORK(notsupported
byPE501X) NETWORK NETWORK,COMPUTER
USBDISPLAY USBDISPLAY USBDISPLAY,COMPUTER
BEEP ON OFF,ON
TOOLS(notsupportedbyPE501X)
OPTIONS(2)
STANDBYMODE POWER-SAVING NORMAL,POWER-SAVING,NETWORKSTANDBY(not
supportedbyPE501X)
DIRECTPOWERON OFF OFF,ON
AUTOPOWERON(COMP.) OFF OFF,ON
AUTOPOWEROFF 0:30 OFF,0:05,0:10,0:20,0:30,1:00
DEFAULTSOURCESELECT LAST LAST,AUTO,COMPUTER,HDMI1,HDMI2,VIDEO,
S-VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORK,USBDISPLAY(VIEWER
andNETWORKarenotsupportedbyPE501X)
CARBONCONVERT
CURRENCY $, €,JP¥,RMB¥
CURRENCYCONVERT
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
91
5. Using On-Screen Menu
MenuItem Default Options
INFO.
USAGETIME
LAMPLIFEREMAINING
LAMPHOURSUSED
FILTERHOURSUSED
TOTALCARBONSAVINGS
TOTALCOSTSAVINGS
SOURCE(1)
SOURCENAME
SOURCEINDEX
HORIZONTALFREQUENCY
VERTICALFREQUENCY
SYNCTYPE
SYNCPOLARITY
SCANTYPE
SOURCE(2)
SIGNALTYPE
VIDEOTYPE
BITDEPTH
VIDEOLEVEL
WIREDLAN
(notsupported
byPE501X)
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
WIRELESSLAN
(notsupported
byPE501X)
IPADDRESS
SUBNETMASK
GATEWAY
MACADDRESS
SSID
NETWORKTYPE
WEP/WPA
CHANNEL
SIGNALLEVEL
VERSION(1) FIRMWARE
DATA
VERSION(2) FIRMWARE2
OTHERS
PROJECTORNAME
MODELNO.
SERIALNUMBER
LANUNITTYPE(notsupportedby
PE501X)
CONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]is
set)
RESET
CURRENTSIGNAL
ALLDATA
CLEARLAMPHOURS
CLEARFILTERHOURS
* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.
92
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❹ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]
COMPUTER
SelectsthecomputerconnectedtoyourCOMPUTERinputconnectorsignal.
NOTE:WhenthecomponentinputsignalisconnectedtotheCOMPUTERINconnector,select[COMPUTER].
HDMI1 and 2
SelectstheHDMIcompatibleequipmentconnectedtoyourHDMI1or2INconnector.
VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourVIDEOinput-VCR,DVDplayerordocumentcamera.
S-VIDEO
SelectswhatisconnectedtoyourS-VIDEOinput-VCRorDVDplayer.
NOTE:Aframemayfreezeforabriefperiodoftimewhenavideoisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindwithaVideoorS-
Videosource.
VIEWER (not supported by PE501X)
ThisfeatureenablesyoutomakepresentationsusingaUSBmemorythatcontainsslides.
(→page59“4.UsingtheViewer”)
NETWORK (not supported by PE501X)
SelectsasignalfromtheLANport(RJ-45)ortheinstalledUSBwirelessLANunit(optional).
USB DISPLAY
SelectsthecomputerconnectedtotheUSB(PC)port(typeB)byusingacommerciallyavailableUSBcable.
(→page40)
93
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❺ Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]
[PICTURE]
[PRESET]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.
Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.
Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]toset
useradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.
Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values
DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
NOTE:
• The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.
• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-
ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).
 Thestandardspecieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
94
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[GENERAL]
StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].
First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-
TURE].
HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�
PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�
VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�
MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies�
GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics�
sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values�
DICOM SIM� ���������� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�
SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]
Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:
DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture�
NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture�
BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]
Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.
LARGE ������������������� For screen size of 110"
MEDIUM ���������������� For screen size of 90"
SMALL ������������������� For screen size of 70"
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].
AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.
NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.
AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoadjustthecontrastratioopticallyusingthebuilt-iniris.
Toincreasethecontrastratio,select[ON].
SelectingStillImageModeorMovieMode[IMAGEMODE]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectthestillimagemodeorthemoviemode.
STILL ��������������������� This mode is for a still image�
MOVIE ������������������� This mode is for a movie�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].
95
5. Using On-Screen Menu
EnhancingtheColor[COLORENHANCEMENT]
Thisfunctionallowsyoutoenhancethecolorofimage.
OFF ������������������������ Does not enhance the color
ON ������������������������� Enhances the color�
NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[PRESENTATION]isselected[REFERENCE].
AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]
Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;
Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.
[CONTRAST]
Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.
[BRIGHTNESS]
Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.
[SHARPNESS]
Controlsthedetailoftheimage.
[COLOR]
Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.
[HUE]
Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.
Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE
COMPUTER/HDMI(RGB) Yes Yes Yes No No
COMPUTER/HDMI(COMPONENT) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VIDEO/S-VIDEO Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
VIEWER/NETWORK/USBDISPLAY Yes Yes Yes No No
Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable
[RESET]
Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;
Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.
Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselected
willnotbereset.
96
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[IMAGE OPTIONS]
AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]
ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.
CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This
function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�
This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�
PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is
evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)
Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�
NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.
97
5. Using On-Screen Menu
AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]
Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.
NOTE:
• The[HORIZONTAL]and[VERTICAL]itemsarenotavailableforVIDEO,S-VIDEO,HDMI,VIEWER,NETWORK,andUSBDIS-
PLAY.
• TheHORIZONTALandVERTICALcannotbeadjusteddependingonthesignal.
- Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.
- Theadjustmentsfor[CLOCK],[PHASE],[HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestoredinmemoryforthe
currentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,
itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.
 Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]or[ALL
DATA]andresettheadjustments.
SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]
Selectoverscanpercentage(AUTO,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.
Projected image
Overscaned by 10%
NOTE:
• The[0[%]]cannotbeselectedwhenVIDEOandS-VIDEOsignalsareused.
• The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable:
 •when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO].
 •when[VIEWER],[NETWORK],or[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[SOURCE]
 •dependingonthesignal
• IftheprojectordoesnotreectthesettingsforyourHDMIequipmentsuchasaDVDplayerconnectedtotheHDMI1INorHDMI
2INconnector,selecttheHDMI1orHDMI2inputsourceagainontheprojector.
98
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SelectingAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]
Theterm“aspectratio”referstotheratioofwidthtoheightofaprojectedimage.
Theprojectorautomaticallydeterminestheincomingsignalanddisplaysitinitsappropriateaspectratio.
• Thistableshowstypicalresolutionsandaspectratiosthatmostcomputerssupport.
Resolution AspectRatio
VGA 640×480 4:3
SVGA 800×600 4:3
XGA 1024×768 4:3
WXGA 1280×768 15:9
WXGA 1280×800 16:10
WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10
SXGA 1280×1024 5:4
SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3
UXGA 1600×1200 4:3
WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10
Options Function
AUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspect
ratio.(→ nextpage)
Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthis
occurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.
4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.
16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio.
15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio.
16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratio.
WIDEZOOM
(P501X/P451X/PE501X)
Theimageisstretchedleftandright.
Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenot
visible.
LETTERBOX
(P451W/P401W)
Theimageofaletterboxsignalisstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirec-
tionstotthescreen.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedatthetopandbottom
edgesandthereforenotvisible.
NATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputer
signalhasalowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.
[Example 1]When theincoming
signalwith the resolution of800
×600 is displayedon the P501X/
P451X/PE501X:
[Example 2]When theincoming
signalwiththeresolutionof800×
600is displayedon the P451W/
P401W:
NOTE:
• Whenanon-computersignalisdisplayed,the[NATIVE]isnotavailable.
• Whenasignalwithahigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolutionisdisplayed,[NA-
TIVE]isnotavailable.
NOTE:
• TheASPECTfeaturemaynotbeavailabledependingonthesignal.
99
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Sampleimagewhentheappropriateaspectratioisautomaticallydetermined
P501X/P451X/PE501X
[Computersignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sampleimagewhentheappro-
priate aspect ratioisautomati-
callydetermined
[Videosignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sampleimage when the as-
pectratioisautomatically de-
termined NOTE:Todisplayasqueezedsignalprop-
erly,select[16:9]or[WIDEZOOM].
P451W/P401W
[Computersignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 5:4 16:9 15:9 16:10
Sampleimagewhentheappro-
priate aspect ratioisautomati-
callydetermined
[Videosignal]
Aspectratioofincomingsignal 4:3 Letterbox Squeeze
Sampleimage when the as-
pectratioisautomatically de-
termined NOTE:Todisplayaletterboxsignalprop-
erly,select[LETTERBOX].
NOTE:Todisplayasqueezedsignalprop-
erly,select[16:9].
TIP:
• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.
• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspect
ratioforavideosource.
 Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formovielm.
• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.
AdjustingtheVerticalPositionofImage[POSITION](notsupportedbyP451W/P401W)
(onlywhen[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO])
When[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]isselectedin[ASPECTRATIO],theimageisdisplayedwithblackbordersonthetop
and bottom.
Youcanadjusttheverticalpositionfromthetoptothebottomoftheblackarea.
100
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[AUDIO]
TurningUporDownSound
AdjuststhevolumeoftheprojectorspeakerandAUDIOOUT(StereoMiniJack).
TIP:
• Whennomenusappear,the◀and▶buttonsontheprojectorcabinetandtheVOL.+/−buttonsontheremotecontrolworkas
avolumecontrol.(→page26)
101
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❻ Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]
[GENERAL]
CorrectingKeystoneDistortionManually[KEYSTONE]
Youcancorrecthorizontalorverticalkeystone,pincushion,orcornerstonedistortionmanually.
NOTE:
• Someitemsarenotavailablewhenoneitemisactivated.Unavailableitemsareshowningrey.
• Tochangefromoneitemtoanotheritem,resettherstitem.
• Adjustmentvalueswillbeoverwritten.Theywillnotbedeletedevenwhentheprojectoristurnedoff.
• Using[KEYSTONE]correctioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.
KEYSTONE HORIZONTAL ��������� Corrects horizontal keystone distortion� (→ page 24)
KEYSTONE VERTICAL��������������� Corrects vertical keystone distortion� (→ page 24)
PINCUSHION LEFT/RIGHT �������� Corrects pincushion distortion at the left or right side�
PINCUSHION TOP/BOTTOM ����� Corrects pincushion distortion at the top or bottom side�
CORNERSTONE ������������������������ Fits a projected image within the border of the screen easily by align the four corner of an image
to the ones of the screen� (→ page 36)
RESET ��������������������������������������� Returns all the above items to the factory preset values�
Correctingpincushiondistortion
NOTE:
• The[PINCUSHIONLEFT/RIGHT]or[PINCUSHIONTOP/BOTTOM]itemisnotavailablewhen[KEYSTONEHORIZONTAL],[KEY-
STONEVERTICAL]or[CORNERSTONE]isactivated.
• Beforeperformingcorrection,setthelensshifttothecenterposition.
1. Press the ▼ or ▲buttontoselect[PINCUSHIONLEFT/RIGHT]or[PINCUSHIONTOP/BOTTOM].
2. Press the ◀ or ▶buttontocorrectdistortion.
3. Press ENTER button.
102
5. Using On-Screen Menu
UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]
Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.
NOTE:Selecting[WHITEBOARD]reduceslampbrightness.
SettingEcoMode[ECOMODE]
TheECOMODEincreaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownonCO2 emissions.
Fourbrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF],[AUTOECO],[NORMAL]and[ECO]modes.
(→page30)
103
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]
ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideo
orS-Video.
OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode�
CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed�
TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed�
NOTE:
• Theclosedcaptionisnotavailableunderthefollowingconditions:
- whenmessagesormenusaredisplayed.
- whenanimageismagnied,frozen,ormuted.
• Portionsofsuperimposedtextorclosedcaptionmaybetruncated.Ifthathappens,trytoplacethesuperimposedtextor
closedcaptionwithinthescreen.
UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]
1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.
2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control.
3. Theremainingtimestartscountingdown.
4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.
NOTE:
• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.
• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3
MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.
SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]
Youcanchooseoneof29languagesforon-screeninstructions.
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
[MENU]
SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]
Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.
TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[SOURCEDISPLAY]
ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasCOMPUTER,HDMI1,HDMI2,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,
NETWORK,USBDISPLAY,tobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.
Whennoinputsignalispresent,theno-signalguidancepromptingyoutocheckforanavailableinputwillbedisplayed
atthecenterofthescreen.Whenthe[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]itemisselectedfor[SOURCE],theno-signalguid-
ancewillnotbedisplayed.
104
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]
ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control
is pressed�
TurningOn/OffEcoMessage[ECOMESSAGE]
Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.
TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessage
topromptyoutoselect[AUTOECO],[NORMAL],or[ECO]for[ECOMODE].
When[AUTOECO],[NORMAL],or[ECO]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor
30 seconds.
When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]
PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page30)
Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.
SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.The
presetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-
torypreset.
SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]
Usethis featureto displaya blue/blackscreen orlogowhen no signal isavailable.The default backgroundis
[BLUE].
NOTE:
• Ifthe[LOGO]itemisselectedfor[BACKGROUND]withthe[NETWORK]or[USBDISPLAY]sourceselected,the[BLUE]itemwill
beselectedregardlessofitsselection.
• When[SOURCEDISPLAY]isturnedon,theno-signalguidancepromptingyoutocheckforanavailableinputwillbedisplayed
atthecenterofthescreenregardlessofitsselection.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
SelectingIntervalTimeforFilterMessage[FILTERMESSAGE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthelters.Clean
thelterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANTHEFILTER.”(→page156)
Optionsareavailable:
OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H]
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
105
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[INSTALLATION]
SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]
Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,
desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.
DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR
DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT
DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]
ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.
NOTE:
• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.
• Whenthecontrolpanelislocked,pressingandholdingtheEXITbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforabout10secondswillchange
thesettingto[OFF].
TIP:Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.
EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]
ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.
Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page33)
NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
106
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]
ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to38400bps.The
defaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequip-
ment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).
NOTE:Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]
Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.
Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,andBACK.
Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrol
sensoroftheprojector,changeanotheroption.
SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]
YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROL
IDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogether
usingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.
CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�
CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-
ting�
NOTE:
• When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupport
theCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
• PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControl
ID.
AssigningorChangingtheControlID
1. Turn on the projector.
2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control.
 TheCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.
 IftheprojectorcanbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,the[ACTIVE]will
bedisplayed.IftheprojectorcannotbeoperatedwiththecurrentremotecontrolID,
the[INACTIVE]willbedisplayed.Tooperatetheinactiveprojector,assignthecontrol
IDusedfortheprojectorbyusingthefollowingprocedure(Step3).
3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSET
button on the remote control.
Example:
 Toassign“3”,pressthe“3”buttonontheremotecontrol.
 NoIDmeansthatalltheprojectorscanbeoperatedtogetherwithasingleremote
control.Toset“NoID”,enter“000”orpresstheCLEARbutton.
TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.
107
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Release the ID SET button.
 TheupdatedCONTROLIDscreenwillbedisplayed.
NOTE:
• TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.
• Accidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrentlyspecied
IDwithbatteriesremoved.
UsingTestPattern[TESTPATTERN]
Displaysthetestpatterntocheckforimagedistortionatthetimeoftheprojectorsetup.PresstheENTERbuttonto
displaythetestpattern;presstheEXITbuttontoclosethetestpatternandreturntothemenu.Menuoperationand
keystonecorrectionarenotpossiblewhenthetestpatternisdisplayed.
SettingMICGain[MICGAIN]
ThisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustyourmicrophonesensitivitywhenitisconnectedtotheMICinputjackoftheprojec-
tor.MicrophonevolumecanbeadjustedwiththeVOL.(+)or(−)buttonontheremotecontrolorthe◀ or ▶ on the
projectorcabinet.
[NETWORKINGSETTINGS](notsupportedbyPE501X)
See“APPLICATIONMENU”onpage120.
[OPTIONS(1)]
SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]
ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfor
noiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].
OFF ������������������������ The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�
NORMAL ���������������� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�
FINE ����������������������� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-
MAL]is selected�
SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]
Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthreemodesforfanspeed:Automode,Highspeedmode,andHighAltitudemode.
AUTO ��������������������� The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature�
HIGH ���������������������� The built-in fans run at high speed�
HIGH ALTITUDE ����� The built-in fans run at a proper speed for low air pressure areas� Select this option when using the projector
in low air pressure areas or at an altitude of approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher�
Whenyouwishtocooldownthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorquickly,select[HIGH].
108
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NOTE:
• ItisrecommendedthatyouselectHighspeedmodeifyouusetheprojectornon-stopforconsecutivedays.
• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigher.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancause
theprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1700metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethe
lamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].
• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuch
asthelamp.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
TIP:
• When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselected,anicon[ ]isdisplayedatthebottomoftheon-screenmenu.
SelectingSignalFormat[SIGNALSELECT]
[COMPUTER]
Allowsyoutochoose[COMPUTER]foranRGBsourcesuchasacomputer,or[COMPONENT]foracomponent
videosourcesuchasaDVDplayer.Normallyselect[RGB/COMPONENT]andtheprojectorautomaticallydetectsa
componentsignal.Howevertheremaybesomecomponentsignalsthattheprojectorisunabletodetect.Ifthisisthe
case,select[COMPONENT].
[VIDEO&S-VIDEOSystemSelect]
Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselectcompositevideostandardsautomaticallyormanually.
Normallyselect[AUTO]andtheprojectorwillautomaticallydetectthevideostandard.
Inthecasewheretheprojectorhasdifcultydetectingthevideostandard,selecttheappropriatevideostandardfrom
the menu.
ThismustbedoneforVIDEOandS-VIDEOrespectively.Notethatifyouhavemanuallyselectedavideostandard
otherthanthevideoformatofthecurrentinput,theimagewillnotappear.
EnablingorDisablingWXGAMode[WXGAMODE]
Selecting[ON]willgiveprioritytoWXGA(1280×768)/WUXGA(1920×1200)signalsinrecognizinganinputsig-
nal.
When[WXGAMODE]issetto[ON],XGA(1024×768)/UXGA(1600×1200)signalsmaynotberecognizedon
P501X/P451X/PE501X.Inthiscase,select[OFF].
NOTE:
• The[OFF]isselectedatthetimeofshipmentofP501X/P451X/PE501X.
• The[ON]isselectedatthetimeofshipmentofP451W/P401W.
EnablingtheDeinterlace[DEINTERLACE]
Turnsonoroffthedeinterlacefunctionforatelecinesignal.
OFF ������������������������ Select this option if there is any jitter or artifacts in video�
ON ������������������������� Default standard setting�
NOTE:ThisfeatureisnotavailableforHDTV(progressive)andcomputersignals.
109
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SettingHDMI1/2[HDMISETTINGS]
MakethesettingsforeachvideolevelwhenconnectingHDMIequipmentsuchasaDVDplayer.
VIDEO LEVEL ��������� Select [AUTO] to automatically detect video level� If automatic detection may not work well, select [NOR-
MAL] to disable the [ENHANCED] feature of your HDMI equipment or select [ENHANCED] to improve image
contrast and increase detail in the dark areas�
NOTE:
• IftheprojectordoesnotreectthesettingsforyourHDMIequipmentsuchasaDVDplayerconnectedtotheHDMI1INorHDMI
2INconnector,selecttheHDMI1orHDMI2inputsourceagainontheprojector.
SettingAudio[AUDIOSELECT]
MakethesettingsforeachaudiolevelwhenconnectingHDMIequipment,yournetwork,andUSB(PC)port.Select
betweeneachequipmentandcomputer.
HDMI ��������������������� Select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2] to switch the HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 IN digital audio signal and select [COMPUTER]
to switch the COMPUTER input audio signal�
NETWORK ������������� Select [NETWORK] or [COMPUTER] to switch the source connected to the network� (not supported by
PE501X)
USB DISPLAY �������� Select [USB DISPLAY] or [COMPUTER] to switch the source connected over the USB cable (USB DIS-
PLAY)�
EnablingKeySoundandErrorSound[BEEP]
Thisfeatureturnsonoroffthebuttonsoundoralarmwhenanerroroccursorthefollowingoperationsareper-
formed.
-Displayingthemainmenu
-Switchingsources
-Resettingdatabyusing[RESET]
-PressingPOWERONorPOWEROFFbutton
[TOOLS](notsupportedbyPE501X)
See“APPLICATIONMENU”onpage136.
110
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OPTIONS(2)]
SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]
Theprojectorhasthreestandbymodes:[NORMAL],[POWER-SAVING],and[NETWORKSTANDBY].
ThePOWER-SAVINGmodeisthemodethatallowsyoutoputtheprojectorinthepower-savingconditionwhich
consumeslesspowerthantheNORMALmode.
NORMAL ���������������� Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light
- MIC sound will not be output from speaker during this mode�
POWER-SAVING ���� Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off
The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode�
- MONITOR OUT (COMP�) connector, AUDIO OUT connector, and MIC input jack
- LAN and Mail Alert functions
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
- Virtual Remote Tool, USB Display fucntion
NETWORK STANDBY (not supported by PE501X)
������������������������������ When in the standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will not light�
This shows that the projector’s power can be turned on by wired LAN�
When in the standby mode, the following connectors, buttons or functions will not work:
- MONITOR OUT (COMP�) connector, AUDIO OUT connector, and MIC input jack
- Wireless LAN Unit
- [AUTO POWER ON(COMP�)]
- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet
- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control
- PC control commands for other than power-on, USB Display function
NOTE:
• When[CONTROLPANELLOCK],[CONTROLID],or[AUTOPOWERON(COMP.)]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingis
notavailable.
• Evenwhen[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],poweronoroffcanbedonebyusingthePCCONTROLport.
• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2emissionreduction.
• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]
Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.Thiseliminatesthe
needtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.
111
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERON(COMP.)]
WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER
INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.
ThisfunctionalityeliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet
topowerontheprojector.
Tousethisfunction,rstconnectacomputertotheprojectorandtheprojectortoanactiveACinput.
NOTE:
• Disconnectingacomputersignalfromthecomputerwillnotpowerofftheprojector.Werecommendusingthisfunctionincom-
binationoftheAUTOPOWEROFFfunction.
• Thisfunctionwillnotbeavailableunderthefollowingconditions:
- whenacomponentsignalisappliedtotheCOMPUTERINconnector
- whenaSynconGreenRGBsignalorcompositesyncsignalisapplied
• ToenabletheAUTOPOWERON(COMP.)afterturningofftheprojector,wait3secondsandinputacomputersignal.
 Ifacomputersignalisstillpresentwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,theAUTOPOWERON(COMP.)willnotworkandtheprojector
remainsinstandbymode.
EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]
Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:5min.,10min.,
20min.,30min.,60min.)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.
SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT]
Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.
LAST ���������������������� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�
AUTO ��������������������� Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER → HDMI1 → HDMI2 → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → VIEWER
→ NETWORK → USB DISPLAY → COMPUTER and displays the first found source�
COMPUTER ����������� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
HDMI1 ������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
HDMI2 ������������������� Displays the digital source from the HDMI 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
VIDEO �������������������� Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
S-VIDEO ���������������� Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�
VIEWER ����������������� Displays slides or plays back movie files from the USB memory device every time the projector is turned
on� (not supported by PE501X)
NETWORK ������������� Displays a signal from LAN port (RJ-45) or the USB Wireless LAN Unit� (not supported by PE501X)
USB DISPLAY �������� Displays the computer signal from the USB (PC) port every time the projector is turned on�
112
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Settingcarbonfootprintfactor[CARBONCONVERT]
Adjuststhecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcalculation.Theinitialsettingis0.505[kg-CO2/kWh]basedon
theCO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion(2008Edition)publishedbyOECD.
Selectingyourcurrency[CURRENCY]
Displayselectricitypricing(availablein4currencyunits).
$ ���������������������������� US Dollar
€ ��������������������������� EU Euro
JP¥ ������������������������ Japanese Yen
RMB¥ �������������������� Chinese Yuan
Changingcurrencysettingandcurrencyconvertsetting[CURRENCYCONVERT]
ChangescurrencysettingandcurrencyconvertsettingforCARBONMETER.
Theinitialsettingareasfollows:
US Dollar ��������������� 0�11 [$/kWh]
EU Euro ����������������� 0�19 [€/kWh]
Japanese Yen ��������� 20 [¥/kWh]
Chinese Yuan ��������� 0�48 [¥/kWh]
TheinitialsettingsforUSdollar,EUEuro,andJapaneseYenarebasedon“EnergyPricesandTaxes(secondquarter
2010”publishedbyOECD.
TheinitialsettingforChineseYuanisbasedon“ChineseDataFile(2010)”publishedbyJETRO.
113
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❼ Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]
Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhaseightpages.Theinformationincludedisas
follows:
TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMPLIFEREMAINING](%)*
[LAMPHOURSUSED](H)
[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)
[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)
[TOTALCOSTSAVINGS]($)
* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.
 Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFE
REMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.
 Iftheremaininglamptimereaches0hours,theprojectorwillnotturnon.
• Themessagetotheeffectthatthelamportheltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhen
theprojectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.
 Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.
Lamplife(H)
Replacementlamp Model
ECO MODE
OFF/AUTOECO NORMAL ECO
3500 4000 6000 NP23LP P501X/P451W/PE501X
4000 5000 6000 P451X/P401W
• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]
 Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-
culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page31)
114
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[SOURCE(1)]
[SOURCENAME] [SOURCEINDEX]
[HORIZONTALFREQUENCY] [VERTICALFREQUENCY]
[SYNCTYPE] [SYNC POLARITY]
[SCANTYPE]
[SOURCE(2)]
[SIGNALTYPE] [VIDEOTYPE]
[BITDEPTH] [VIDEOLEVEL]
[WIRED LAN] (not supported by PE501X)
[IPADDRESS] [SUBNETMASK]
[GATEWAY] [MACADDRESS]
115
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[WIRELESS LAN] (not supported by PE501X)
[IPADDRESS] [SUBNETMASK]
[GATEWAY] [MACADDRESS]
[SSID] [NETWORKTYPE]
[WEP/WPA] [CHANNEL]
[SIGNALLEVEL]
[VERSION(1)]
[FIRMWARE]Version
[DATA]Version
[VERSION(2)] (not supported by PE501X)
[FIRMWARE2]Version
116
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[OTHERS]
[PROJECTORNAME]
[MODELNO.]
[SERIALNUMBER]
[LANUNITTYPE]
[CONTROLID](when[CONTROLID]isset)
117
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❽ Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET]
TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)except
thefollowing:
[CURRENTSIGNAL]
Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.
Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],
[ASPECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].
[ALLDATA]
Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.
All items can be reset EXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[SECURITY],[COMMU-
NICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[STANDBYMODE],[FANMODE],[CARBONCONVERT],[CURRENCY],
[CURRENCYCONVERT],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTAL
CARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].
Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.
ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]
Resetsthelampclockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
NOTE:Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthe
lamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Inthisconditionyoucannotclearthelamphourmeteronthemenu.Ifthishappens,pressthe
HELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.Dothisonlyafterreplacingthelamp.
ClearingtheFilterUsageHours[CLEARFILTERHOURS]
Resetsthelterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconrmation.Select[YES]andpress
theENTERbutton.
NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
118
5. Using On-Screen Menu
❾ Application Menu (not supported by PE501X)
When[NETWORK]isselectedfromthe[SOURCE]menu,theapplicationmenu[APPLICATIONMENU]willbedis-
played.
TheapplicationmenuallowsyoutosetuptheUserSupportware,NetworkSettings(NETWORKSETTINGS)and
Tools(TOOLS).
TheUserSupportwareiscontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.
In[ADMINISTRATORMODE],either[ADVANCED]menuor[BASIC]menucanbeselected.(→page136)
The[BASIC]menucontainsminimumessentialsofmenusandcommands.
IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITY
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseImage
ExpressUtility.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY
Thisallowsyoutosetupforpasswordentry/deletion,computersearchingandIPaddressonnetwork(wired/wireless)
whicharerequiredtouseDesktopControlUtility.
119
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK PROJECTOR
Thisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseNetwork
Projector.
Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.
REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION
ThisallowsyoutosetupforcomputernameentryandeffectsforRemoteDesktop.
NOTE:
• AUSBkeyboardisrequiredtosetuptheRemoteDesktopConnection.
120
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORK SETTINGS
Important:
• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.
• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→page
151)
TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.
HintsonHowtoSetUpLANConnection
TosetuptheprojectorforaLANconnection:
Select[WIREDLAN]or[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].
TwosettingscanbesetforwiredorwirelessLAN.
Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpressthe
ENTERbutton.(→page121)
TorecallLANsettingsstoredintheprolenumber:
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredorwirelessLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
(→page121)
To connect a DHCP server:
Turnon[DHCP]forwiredorwirelessLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithout
usingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page122)
TosetonlyforwirelessLAN(NETWORKTYPEandWEP/WPA):
Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwirelessLAN,andthenselect[ADVANCED]and[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.TheAdvancedmenuwillbedisplayed.(→page123)
ToselectanSSID:
Select[ADVANCED]→[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
SelectanSSIDandpressthe>buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Ifyoudonotuse[SITESURVEY],typetheSSIDandselect[INFRASTRUCTURE]or[ADHOC].(→page123)
Toreceivelampreplacementtimeorerrormessagesviae-mail:
Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].
Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page134)
Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility2.0:
The[EASYCONNECTION]isamodethatcanabbreviatethetroublesomeLANsettingswhenusingtheImage
ExpressUtilityandconnectingthePCandprojectorviaawirelessLAN.
TheImageExpressUtilityLiteandImageExpressUtility2.0arecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-
ROM.
Touse[EASYCONNECTION],select[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].
NOTE:The[EASYCONNECTION]functionisavailableonWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPSP3.
121
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WIREDLANorWIRELESSLAN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
PROFILES • UptotwosettingsfortheLANportorUSBwirelessLANunit
canbestoredinmemoryoftheprojector.Totaloffoursettings
can be stored.
 Fivesettingscanbestored:twoforthebuilt-inLANport,two
forwirelessLANandoneforWPS.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor
[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.
 Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.This
willstoreyoursettingsinmemory.
• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory:
 Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-
FILES]list.
 Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
• Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility
LiteorImageExpressUtility2.0,select[WIRELESSLAN]→
[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].
• TostopemittingradiowavesfromtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,
select[DISABLE]fromthe[PROFILES]list.
• Selecting[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]willallowtheprojectorto
createaninfrastructurenetwork.
 TheIPaddressoftheprojectorwillbesetautomatically.
 Select“ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically”tosettheIPad-
dressofaconnectedcomputer.
 Ittakesafewsecondsforachangeofyourcomputer’sIPad-
dresstocomeintoeffectinWindows7/WindowsVistawhileit
takesoneortwominutesinWindowXP.
 Whenyouconnect with yourcomputer to save yourprole
andselect“Automaticallyconnectwhenwithinrange”fromthe
PropertiestabofWirelessNetworkinWindowsforyourselected
prole,yourwirelessLANwillbeaccessedunderthefollowing
conditions:
• atthetimeofturningonthecomputerortheprojector
• whenthenotebooktypeiswithintherangeoftheprojector’s
wirelessLANcanbeachieved.
 DatatransmissionbetweenwirelessLANandwiredLANisnot
possible.
 Whenthe[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]modeisusedtosend
images,itisrecommendedtoconnecttoonlyonecomputer.
—
122
5. Using On-Screen Menu
• Whenselecting[WPS],thenetworkwillbeconnectedbyusing
settingsstoredautomaticallywiththeWPSfunction.
 Selecting[WPS]willallowtheprojectortoaccessthenetwork
byusingthesettingstheWPSfunctionautomaticallystored.
DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstothe
projectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmask
numberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.
—
IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtothe
projectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector
when[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
WNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.
Upto12numeric
characters
AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyour
DNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.
ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserver
connectedtotheprojector.
—
DNSCONFIGURA-
TION
SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnected
totheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.
Upto12numeric
characters
ADVANCED* ThismenuallowsyoutosetvariousitemsforyourwirelessLAN
connection(networktype,security).
—
RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhave
changed[PROFILES].
—
*The[ADVANCED]settingscreenisavailablefor[WIRELESSLAN]only.
NOTE:
• Ifyouselect[EASYCONNECTION]from[PROFILES],youcannotmakesettingstoDHCPanditsfollowingitemsexcept[CHAN-
NEL]in[ADVANCED].
ADVANCEDSetting(requiredforwirelessLANonly)(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
123
5. Using On-Screen Menu
SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.Select
anSSIDwhichyoucanaccess.
ToselectanSSID,highlight[SSID]andusetheSELECT→ to
select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
����������������������� Wireless access point
����������������������� Ad Hoc PC
����������������������� WEP or WPA enabled
—
SECURITY Thiswillturnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmis-
sion.
Touseencryption,specifyaWEPkeyorencryptionkey.Select
yoursecuritytypeappropriateforyourcomputerandthewire-
lessLANunit.
DISABLE ���������������� Will not turn on the encryption feature� Your com-
munications may be monitored by someone�
WEP(64bit) ������������ Uses 64-bit datalength for secure transmis-
sion�
WEP(128bit) ���������� Uses 128-bit datalength for secure transmission�
This option will increase privacy and security
when compared to use of 64-bit datalength en-
cryption�
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP
������������������������������ These options provide stronger security than
WEP�
NOTE:
• Thesecuritytype,WEPkey,andencryptionkeysettingsmustbethe
sameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointinyour
wirelessnetwork.
• Whenyouuse[SECURITY],yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslow
down.
• [WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK]and[WPA2-EAP]arenotavail-
ablewhen[ADHOC]isselectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].
—
SSID Enteranidentier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.Communicationcan
bedoneonlywithequipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyour
wirelessLAN.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters(case
sensitive).
NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.
INFRASTRUCTURE ���Select this option when communicating with
one or more equipment connected to the wire-
less or wired LAN network via a wireless access
point�
AD HOC ��������������������Select this option when using the wireless LAN
to directly communicate with a computer in
peer-to-peer mode�
—
CHANNEL Select a channel. Available channels vary depending on the
countryandregion.Whenyouselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],make
surethattheprojectorandyouraccesspointareonthesame
channel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojector
andyourcomputerareonthesamechannel.
—
124
5. Using On-Screen Menu
When[WEP(64bit)]or[WEP(128bit)]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]
KEYSELECT SelectsoneWEPkeyfromthefourkeysbelow.
KEY1,KEY2,KEY3,
KEY4
EnteraWEPkey.
•Maximumnumberofcharacters
Option Alphanumeric(ASCII) Hexadecimal(HEX)
WEP64bit 5 10
WEP 128bit 13 26
When[WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK],or[WPA2-EAP]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]
ENCRYPTIONTYPE Select[TKIP]or[AES].
KEY Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.
125
5. Using On-Screen Menu
[AUTHENTICATION](requiredforwirelessonly)
SettingisrequiredforusingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
Preparationbeforesetting
SelectawirelessLANcompliantWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPauthenticationandinstalladigitalcerticateontheprojec-
tor.
1. Set[DATEANDTIME]ontheprojector.(→page140)
2. Useacomputertosavedigitalcerticates(les)forWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPsettingtoyourUSBmemory
device.
After completing saving the file, remove the USB memory device from the computer.
Important:
• Saveadigitalcerticate(le)totherootfolderoftheUSBmemory.
• TheleformatsofdigitalcerticatethataresupportedbytheprojectorareDERandPKCS#12only.
• Theprojectorcannothandleanydigitalcerticatewhoselesizeexceeds8KB.
• CRL(CerticateRelocationList)isnotsupported.
• Clientcerticatechainisnotsupported.
3. PlugtheUSBmemorydeviceintotheUSBportoftheprojector.
USB
SettingProcedures
1. Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSSLAN].
2. SetitemssuchasPROFILES,DHCP,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASKandothersasrequired.
• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]for[PROFILES].If[EASYCONNECTION]isselected,WPA-PSK,WPA2-
PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is not available.
3. Select[ADVANCED]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ADVANCED] setting screen will be displayed.
126
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4. Select[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The“SSID”listwillbedisplayed.
5. SelectaconnectingSSID,andthenselect[OK].
Finally press the ENTER button.
• SelecttheSSIDforwhichWPA-PSKorWPA2-PSKisset.
• Select[INFRASTRUCTURE( )] for [NETWORK TYPE]. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is
not available when [AD HOC ( )] is selected.
6. Selectthe[SECURITY]tab.
 The[SECURITY]pagewillbedisplayed.
7. Selectthe[SECURITYTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
8. Select[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP]andpresstheENTERbutton.
9. Selectthe[TKIP/AES]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
10
.Select[TKIP]or[AES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Select[TKIP]or[AES]accordingtothesettingforyouraccesspoint.
127
5. Using On-Screen Menu
11
.Selectthe[AUTHENTICATION]tab.
 The[AUTHENTICATION]pagewillbedisplayed.
Select either [EAP-TLS] or [PEAP-MSCHAPv2] for [EAP TYPE]. The setting items vary depending on the EAP
type.
See the table below.
EAPType SettingItem Note
EAP-TLS UserName 1 character or more and 32 characters or
less
ClientCerticate PKCS#12formatle
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
PEAP-MSCHAPv2 UserName 1 character or more and 32 characters or
less
Password 1 character or more and 32 characters or
less
CACerticate
(Certicateauthority’scerticate)
DERformatle
①Selecting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]:
The following section explains the operation for selecting [EAP-TLS].
For selecting [PEAP-MSCHAPv2], go on to Step 12 on page 129.
12.
Selectthe[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setausername.
• Ausernamemustbe1characterormoreand32charactersorless.
• Seepage131forusingthesoftwarekeyboardtoentercharacters.
128
5. Using On-Screen Menu
13.
Select[CLIENTCERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Alistofles([FILES]screen)willbedisplayed.
• Foroperatingthe[FILES]screen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installingadigitalcerticate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-lebasis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
14.
Onthe[FILES]screen,selectadigitalcerticate(PKCS#12formatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydevice
andpresstheENTERbutton.
The password screen will be displayed.
15.
Select[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setthepasswordoftheprivatekey.Apassword
must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less.
The selected digital certificate file will be installed on the projector.
• WhentherootCAcerticateisnotincludedinthelethatwasselectedinStep14,proceedtoStep16.When
the root certification authority certificate is included, proceed to Step 18.
16.Select[CACERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
129
5. Using On-Screen Menu
17.
Onthe[FILES]screen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydeviceand
press the ENTER button.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[WIRELESS]pagewillbereturned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearingthedigitalcerticatethatisinstalledontheprojector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
• ThePKCS#12formatdigitalcerticateincludingaCAcerticatewillbeinstalledasarootCAcerticate.
②Selecting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]:
12.
Fromthe[AUTHENTICATION]page,select[EAPTYPE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The pull-down list will be displayed.
13.
Select[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]andpresstheENTERbutton.
14.
Select[USERNAME]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setausername.
• Ausernamemustbe32charactersorless.
(→ page 131)
130
5. Using On-Screen Menu
15.
Aftercompletingsettingausername,selectthe[PASSWORD]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.Setapassword.
• Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.
16.
Aftercompletingsettingthepassword,select[CACERTIFICATE]eldandpresstheENTERbutton.
The drive list screen will be displayed.
• Foroperatingthe[FILES]screen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).
• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.
NOTE:
Installingadigitalcerticate
Youcaninstalleachdigitalcerticate(clientcerticateandCAcerticate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onale-by-le
basis.
• InstallarootCAcerticateforaCAcerticate.
• Ifyouinstalladigitalcerticateoveryourexistingdigitalcerticate,theexistingdigitalcerticatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenew
digitalcerticate.
• Onceadigitalcerticatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.
17.
Onthe[FILES]screen,selectadigitalcerticate(DERformatle)savedinyourUSBmemorydeviceand
press the ENTER button.
• SelectyourrootCAcerticatehere.
The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.
131
5. Using On-Screen Menu
18.
Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[WIRELESS]pagewillbereturned.
19.
Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.
20.
Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
Thiswillcompletesetting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].
TIP:
Clearingthedigitalcerticatethatisinstalledontheprojector
Toclearthedigitalcerticateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.
Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcerticatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprolewillbecleared.
1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-
VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.
A message for confirmation will be displayed.
2. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The digital certificates will be cleared.
TIP:
EnteringWEPkeys(SwitchingbetweenAlphanumericcharactersandhexadecimal)
Toenterfrom[KEY1]to[KEY4],dothefollowing:
1. Selectoneof[KEY1],[KEY2],[KEY3]and[KEY4]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbedisplayed.
2. Use the ▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectacharacterandpresstheENTERbutton.
• ToenteraWEPkeyorpassphrase,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII)orhexadecimal(HEX).ToenteraPSK
key,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII).
• Pressthe[HEX]buttontochangeto[ASCII]tosetthekeyinASCIIdigit.Youcantogglethisbuttonbetween
[ASCII]and[HEX].
• Enter0x(numeralandalphabetrespectively)rightinfrontofyourkeycode.
• Hexadecimaluses0to9andAtoF.
3. AfterenteringyourWEPkeyorpassphrase,usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTER
button.
 Thecharacterentryscreen(softwarekeyboard)willbeclosed.
132
5. Using On-Screen Menu
WPS
WhenthewirelessLANaccesspointconnectedtotheprojectorsupportsWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetup™),youcan
usePINmethodorpushbuttonmethodtosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.
PINTYPE Seta4-digitor8digit-PINcodeofWPSforyouraccesspointtocompletesettingforthe
SSIDsecurity.
PUSHBUTTONTYPE Pressthededicatedbuttonoftheaccesspointandtheprojector’swirelessLANunitto
completesettingfortheSSIDsecurity.
NETWORKINFORMATION
Thefollowinginformationwillbedisplayedwhentheprojectorisconnectedto anetwork(wiredLANor wireless
LAN).
PROJECTORNAME
HOSTNAME
DOMAIN
NETWORKINFOR-
MATION(WIRED
LAN/WIRELESSLAN)
CONNECTIONSTATUS,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASK,GATEWAY,WINS,DNS,MAC
ADDRESS,SSID,NETWORKTYPE,WEP/WPA,CHANNEL,SIGNALLEVEL,AU-
THENTICATION,AUTHENTICATIONPERIOD
DISPLAYTHEINFOR-
MATIONINAPPLICA-
TIONMENU
Turnonoroffthedisplayofthenetworkinformation.
Themeaningsofthesestatusstatementsaredescribedbelow.
Statement Authentication status
Authenticated Authenticationisdonecorrectly.
Failure Authenticationfailed.
Authenticating… Authenticationisinprocess.
Expired Thedigitalcerticateisexpired.Or[DATE,TIMEPRESET]isnotsetcorrectly.
Time Error The[DATE,TIMEPRESET]hasbeencleared.Setthecorrectdateandtime.
133
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROJECTORNAME(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-
meric characters and
symbols
DOMAIN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
Setahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.
HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumeric
characters
134
5. Using On-Screen Menu
ALERTMAIL(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerror
messagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.
Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�
Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�
Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:
Thelampandltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Please
replacethelampandlters.
ProjectorName:NECProjector
LampHoursUsed:100[H]
—
HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumeric
characters
DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
SENDER'SAD-
DRESS
Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
meric characters and
symbols
SMTPSERVER
NAME
TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojec-
tor.
Upto60alphanumeric
characters
RECIPIENT'SAD-
DRESS1,2,3
Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-
meric characters and
symbols
TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.
NOTE:
• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceivean
Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient’s Address is
correctlyset.
• Unless any one of the [SENDER'S ADDRESS], [SMTP SERVER'S
NAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]is
notavailable.
• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting
[TESTMAIL].
—
135
5. Using On-Screen Menu
NETWORKSERVICE(ADVANCEDmenuonly)
HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
PJLink Thisoptionallows youto seta passwordwhen youuse the
PJLinkfeature.
NOTE:
• Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,
consultwithyourdealer.
• WhatisPJLink?
 PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectors
ofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardprotocolisestablishedby
JapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-
tion(JBMIA)in2005.
 TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.
• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefrom
themenu.
Upto32alphanumeric
characters
AMX TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhen
connectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrol
system.
TIP:
WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinx
controlsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriate
DeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.
Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device
Discovery�
Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX
Device Discovery�
—
136
5. Using On-Screen Menu
TOOLS
ADMINISTRATOR MODE
ThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.
MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.
(→page89)
—
NOTSAVESETTING
VALUES
Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�
Clear this check box to save your projector settings�
—
NEWPASSWORD/
CONFIRMPASS-
WORD
Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumeric
characters
TIP:
ToreturntotheADVANCEDmenufromtheBASICmenu,dothefollowing:
1. UsetheSOURCEbuttononthecabinetorpresstheNETWORKbuttonontheremotecontroltoselect
[NETWORK]todisplaytheAPPLICATIONMENU.
2. Select[TOOLS]→[ADMINISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE]→[ADVANCEDMODE].
137
5. Using On-Screen Menu
PROGRAM TIMER
Thisoptionturnson/offtheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecied
time.
NOTE:
• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→page140)
• MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected.
• Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemain
powerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,thebuilt-inclockstopsworking.
• The [POWER-SAVING] or [NETWORK STANDBY] of [STANDBY MODE] will be invalidated when [PROGRAM TIMER] is en-
abled.
Settinganewprogramtimer
1. OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usetheSELECT▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTER
button.
 The[PROGRAMLIST]screenwillbedisplayed.
2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[EDIT]screenwillbedisplayed.
3. Makesettingsforeachitemasrequired.
ACTIVE ������������������ Place a check mark to enable the program�
DAY ������������������������ Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-
138
5. Using On-Screen Menu
FRI]�To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�
TIME ���������������������� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�
FUNCTION ������������� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting
[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [SOURCE] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED
SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select [ECO MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-
TINGS]�
ADVANCED SETTINGS
������������������������������ Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�
REPEAT ������������������ Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the
check mark�
4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
This will complete the settings.
 Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.
5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMTIMER]screen.
6. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.
NOTE:
• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.
• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbe
clearedautomaticallyandtheprogramwillbedisabled.
• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.
• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.
• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.
• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuted
untilthepoweroffbecomespossible.
• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimeris
enabled.
• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoit
manuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.
139
5. Using On-Screen Menu
Activatingtheprogramtimer
1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.
The [ENABLE] will be activated.
2. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
 The[PROGRAMTIMER]screenwillbechangedtothe[TOOL]screen.
NOTE:
• Clearing[ENABLE]willdisabletheProgramTimerevenwhenaprogramismarkedwithacheckmarkon[PROGRAMLIST]
screen.
• When[ENABLE]isselected,the[PROGRAMLIST]cannotbeedited.Toedittheprograms,select[ENABLE]toturnofftheProgram
Timer.
Changingtheprogrammedsettings
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.
2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.
3. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The programmed settings will be changed.
 Youwillbereturnedtothe[PROGRAMLIST]screen.
Changingtheorderofprograms
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpresstheSELECT
▶ button.
2. PresstheSELECT▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.
3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.
The order of the programs will be changed.
Deletingtheprograms
1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpresstheSELECT▶
button.
2. PresstheSELECT▼buttontoselect[DELETE].
3. Press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.
The program will be deleted.
This will complete deleting the program.
140
5. Using On-Screen Menu
DATE AND TIME
Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.
NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthe
mainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.The
built-inclockwillnotceasewhileinthestandbymode.
TIME ZONE SETTINGS �������������� Select your time zone�
DATE AND TIME SETTINGS ������ Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)�
INTERNET TIME SERVER ��������� If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet
time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�
UPDATE ������������������������������������ Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available
unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�
SUMMER TIME SETTINGS ������� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�
MOUSE
ThisoptionletsyoutochangeyourUSBmousesettings.ThemousesettingsfeatureisavailableforUSBmouseonly.
Choosethesettingsyouwant:
MOUSE BUTTON ���������������������� [RIGHT HAND] or [LEFT HAND]
MOUSE SENSITIVITY ��������������� [FAST], [MEDIUM] or [SLOW]
141
6. Installation and Connections
3
2
1
Thissectiondescribeshowtosetupyourprojectorandhowtoconnectvideoandaudiosources.
Yourprojectorissimpletosetupanduse.Butbeforeyougetstarted,youmustrst:
① Setupascreenandtheprojector.
② Connectyourcomputerorvideoequip-
menttotheprojector.
(→page145, 147, 148, 149, 150, 151,
152)
③ Connectthe supplied powercord.
(→page14)
NOTE:Ensurethatthepowercordandanyother
cablesaredisconnectedbeforemovingthepro-
jector.Whenmovingtheprojectororwhenitis
notinuse,coverthelenswiththeslidinglens
cover.
❶ Setting Up the Screen and the Projector
Selecting a Location
[P501X/P451X/PE501X]
Thefurtheryourprojectorisfromthescreenorwall,thelargertheimage.Theminimumsizetheimagecanbeis
approximately25"(0.64m)measureddiagonallywhentheprojectorisroughly35inches(0.9m)fromthewallor
screen.Thelargesttheimagecanbeis300"(7.6m)whentheprojectorisabout435inches(11.0m)fromthewall
or screen.
300"
240"
Distance
(Unit: m/inch)
Lens center
Screen Size
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
200"
180"
150"
120"
100"
80"
11.0/435
"
8.8/348
"
6.6/260
"
5.5/216
"
4.4/173
"
3.6/144
"
2.9/115
"
2.2/86
"
1.4/57
"
40"
7.3/289
"
60"
30"
25"
1.1/
42
"
0.9/
35
"
609.6(W)�457.2(H) / 240(W)�180(H)
487.7(W)�365.8(H) / 192(W)�144(H)
406.4(W)�304.8(H) / 160(W)�120(H)
304.8(W)�228.6(H) / 120(W)�90(H)
365.8(W)�274.3(H) / 144(W)�108(H)
243.8(W)�182.9(H) / 96(W)�72(H)
203.2(W)�152.4(H) / 80(W)�60(H)
162.6(W)�121.9(H) / 64(W)�48(H)
121.9(W)�91.4(H) / 48(W)�36(H)
81.3(W)�61.0(H) / 32(W)�24(H)
61.0(W)�45.7(H) / 24(W)�18(H)
50.8(W)�38.1(H) / 20(W)�15(H)
TIP:
• Thedistancesareindicatedbyintermediatevaluesbetweenteleandwide.Useasaruleofthumb.
• Formoredetailsonthrowdistance,seepage143.
To the wall outlet.
142
6. Installation and Connections
[P451W/P401W]
Thefurtheryourprojectorisfromthescreenorwall,thelargertheimage.Theminimumsizetheimagecanbeis
approximately25"(0.64m)measureddiagonallywhentheprojectorisroughly37inches(0.9m)fromthewallor
screen.Thelargesttheimagecanbeis300"(7.6m)whentheprojectorisabout459inches(11.7m)fromthewall
or screen.
300"
240"
Distance
(Unit: m/inch)
Lens center
Screen Size
Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch)
200"
180"
150"
120"
100"
80"
11.7/459
"
9.3/367
"
7.0/275
"
5.8/229
"
4.6/183
"
3.9/152
"
3.1/121
"
2.3/90
"
1.5/60
"
40"
7.8/306
"
60"
30"
25"
1.1/
45
"
0.9/
37
"
646.2(W)�403.9(H) / 254(W)�159(H)
516.9(W)�323.1(H) / 204(W)�127(H)
430.8(W)�269.2(H) / 170(W)�106(H)
323.1(W)�201.9(H) / 127(W)�79(H)
387.7(W)�242.3(H) / 153(W)�95(H)
258.5(W)�161.5(H) / 102(W)�64(H)
215.4(W)�134.6(H) / 85(W)�53(H)
172.3(W)�107.7(H) / 68(W)�42(H)
129.2(W)�80.8(H) / 51(W)�32(H)
86.2(W)�53.8(H) / 34(W)�21(H)
64.6(W)�40.4(H) / 25(W)�16(H)
53.8(W)�33.7(H) / 21(W)�13(H)
TIP:
• Thedistancesareindicatedbyintermediatevaluesbetweenteleandwide.Useasaruleofthumb.
• Formoredetailsonthrowdistance,seepage143.
143
6. Installation and Connections
C
α
B
D
Throw Distance and Screen Size
Thefollowingshowstheproperrelativepositionsoftheprojectorandscreen.Refertothetabletodeterminethe
positionofinstallation.
Distance Chart
B= Vertical distancebetween lens center and
screen center
C= Throwdistance
D= Vertical distancebetween lens center and
screenbottom(topofscreenforceilingap-
plication)
α= Throwangle
NOTE:Thevalues in the tables are design values and
mayvary.
[P501X/P451X/PE501X]
Screen Size BCDα
Diagonal Width Height wide tele wide tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
25 635 20 508 15 381 0–8 0–191 25 643 - 43 1102 -8–0 -191–0 0�0–16�5 - 0�0–9�8
30 762 24 610 18 457 0–9 0–229 31 782 - 52 1333 -9–0 -229–0 0�0–16�3 - 0�0–9�7
40 1016 32 813 24 610 0–12 0–305 42 1060 - 71 1794 -12–0 -305–0 0�0–16�0 - 0�0–9�6
60 1524 48 1219 36 914 0–18 0–457 64 1616 - 107 2717 -18–0 -457–0 0�0–15�8 - 0�0–9�6
72 1829 58 1463 43 1097 0–22 0–549 77 1950 - 129 3271 -22–0 -549–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
80 2032 64 1626 48 1219 0–24 0–610 86 2172 - 143 3641 -24–0 -610–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
84 2134 67 1707 50 1280 0–25 0–640 90 2284 - 151 3825 -25–0 -640–0 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
90 2286 72 1829 54 1372 0–27 0–686 96 2450 - 161 4102 -27–0 -686–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
100 2540 80 2032 60 1524 0–30 0–762 107 2728 - 180 4564 -30–0 -762–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
120 3048 96 2438 72 1829 0–36 0–914 129 3285 - 216 5487 -36–0 -914–0 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
150 3810 120 3048 90 2286 0–45 0–1143 162 4119 - 271 6872 -45–0 -1143–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
180 4572 144 3658 108 2743 0–54 0–1372 195 4953 - 325 8256 -54–0 -1372–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
200 5080 160 4064 120 3048 0–60 0–1524 217 5509 - 361 9180 -60–0 -1524–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
210 5334 168 4267 126 3200 0–63 0–1600 228 5787 - 380 9641 -63–0 -1600–0 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
240 6096 192 4877 144 3658 0–72 0–1829 261 6621 - 434 11026 -72–0 -1829–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
270 6858 216 5486 162 4115 0–81 0–2057 294 7456 - 489 12411 -81–0 -2057–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
300 7620 240 6096 180 4572 0–90 0–2286 326 8290 - 543 13795 -90–0 -2286–0 0�0–15�4 - 0�0–9�4
[P451W/P401W]
Screen Size BCDα
Diagonal Width Height wide tele wide tele
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm - inch mm inch mm degree - degree
25 635 21 538 13 337 0–8 0–202 27 682 - 46 1167 -7–1 -168–34 0�0–16�5 - 0�0–9�8
30 762 25 646 16 404 0–10 0–242 33 829 - 56 1411 -8–2 -202–40 0�0–16�3 - 0�0–9�7
40 1016 34 862 21 538 0–13 0–323 44 1123 - 75 1898 -11–2 -269–54 0�0–16�1 - 0�0–9�7
60 1524 51 1292 32 808 0–19 0–485 67 1710 - 113 2873 -16–3 -404–81 0�0–15�8 - 0�0–9�6
72 1829 61 1551 38 969 0–23 0–582 81 2063 - 136 3458 -19–4 -485–97 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
80 2032 68 1723 42 1077 0–25 0–646 90 2298 - 151 3848 -21–4 -538–108 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
84 2134 71 1809 45 1131 0–27 0–678 95 2415 - 159 4043 -22–4 -565–113 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
90 2286 76 1939 48 1212 0–29 0–727 102 2591 - 171 4336 -24–5 -606–121 0�0–15�7 - 0�0–9�5
100 2540 85 2154 53 1346 0–32 0–808 114 2885 - 190 4823 -26–5 -673–135 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
120 3048 102 2585 64 1615 0–38 0–969 137 3472 - 228 5799 -32–6 -808–162 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
150 3810 127 3231 79 2019 0–48 0–1212 171 4354 - 286 7261 -40–8 -1010–202 0�0–15�6 - 0�0–9�5
180 4572 153 3877 95 2423 0–57 0–1454 206 5235 - 343 8724 -48–10 -1212–242 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
200 5080 170 4308 106 2692 0–64 0–1615 229 5822 - 382 9699 -53–11 -1346–269 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
210 5334 178 4523 111 2827 0–67 0–1696 241 6116 - 401 10187 -56–11 -1414–283 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�5
240 6096 204 5169 127 3231 0–76 0–1939 275 6997 - 459 11649 -64–13 -1615–323 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
270 6858 229 5816 143 3635 0–86 0–2181 310 7878 - 516 13112 -72–14 -1817–363 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
300 7620 254 6462 159 4039 0–95 0–2423 345 8759 - 574 14575 -79–16 -2019–404 0�0–15�5 - 0�0–9�4
Screencenter
Lenscenter
Screenbottom
144
6. Installation and Connections
WARNING
* Installingyourprojectorontheceilingmustbedone
byaqualiedtechnician.ContactyourNECdealerfor
moreinformation.
* Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.
• Onlyuseyourprojectoronasolid,levelsurface.Ifthe
projectorfallstotheground,youcanbeinjuredand
theprojectorseverelydamaged.
• Donot use the projector where temperaturesvary
greatly.Theprojectormustbeusedattemperatures
between41°F (5°C)and 104°F (40°C) (Ecomode
selectedautomaticallyat 95°F to 104°F/35°Cto
40°C).
• Donot exposetheprojector to moisture,dust, or
smoke.Thiswillharmthescreenimage.
• Ensurethat youhave adequateventilationaround
yourprojectorsoheatcandissipate.Donotcoverthe
ventsonthesideorthefrontoftheprojector.
ReectingtheImage
Usingamirrortoreectyourprojector’simageenables
youtoenjoyamuchlargerimagewhenasmallerspace
isrequired.ContactyourNECdealerifyouneedamirror
system.Ifyou’reusingamirrorsystemandyourimage
isinverted,usetheMENUand▲▼◀▶buttonsonyour
projectorcabinetoryourremotecontroltocorrectthe
orientation.(→page105)
145
6. Installation and Connections
Computer cable (VGA) (supplied)
To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the
projector.Itisrecommendedthatyou
use a commercially available distribu-
tion amplifier if connecting a signal
cable longer than the cable supplied.
NOTE:ForMac,useacommerciallyavail-
ablepinadapter(notsupplied)toconnect
toyourMac’svideoport.
A commercially available USB cable
(compatible with USB 2.0 specifications)
Stereo mini-plug audio
cable (not supplied)
❷ Making Connections
NOTE:WhenusingwithanotebookPC,besuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymode
andbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.
InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.
* Ifthescreengoesblankwhileusingyourremotecontrol,itmaybetheresultofthecomputer’sscreen-saverorpowermanage-
mentsoftware.
Enabling the computer’s external display
DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.
WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.
Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon
oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough
externaldisplayselections.
Connecting Your Computer
NOTE:SignalssupportedbyPlug&Play(DDC2B)
INPUT
COMPUTER IN HDMI 1 IN HDMI 2 IN
analog digital digital
Yes Yes Yes
HDMIcable(notsupplied)
UseHighSpeedHDMI® Cable.
146
6. Installation and Connections
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTERIN COMPUTER (COMPUTER1)
HDMI1IN HDMI1 HDMI
HDMI2IN HDMI2 HDMI
USB(PC) USBDISPLAY (USBDISPLAY)
NOTE:TheprojectorisnotcompatiblewithvideodecodedoutputsoftheNECISS-6020switcher.
NOTE:AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackviaacommerciallyavailablescan
converter.
Thisisbecausetheprojectorwillprocessavideosignalasacomputersignalatthedefaultsetting.Inthatcase,dothefollowing.
* Whenanimageisdisplayedwiththelowerandupperblackportionofthescreenoradarkimageisnotdisplayedcorrectly:
 ProjectanimagetollthescreenandthenpresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinet.
NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal
• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-
dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.
• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.
• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC.
 Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,
restartyourPC.
• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormay
resultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromthedigitaloutputofthegraphicscard.
• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojectorisrunning.Ifthesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthen
reconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.
NOTE:When[VIEWER],[NETWORK],or[USBDISPLAY]isselectedfor[SOURCE],soundfromtheCOMPUTERAUDIOINminijack
willbeoutputthroughthespeaker.The[VIEWER]and[NETWORK]arenotsupportedbyPE501X.
NOTE:HDMIinputsignal
DisconnectingandconnectingtheHDMIcablemayresultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromtheHDMIequipmentwhiletheprojec-
torisrunning.
Shouldthishappen,selecttheHDMIinputagain.
<TwowaystoselecttheHDMIinput>
• PresstheHDMIbuttonontheremotecontrol.
• PresstheMENUbuttonontheprojectorcabinet,thenselect[HDMI]from[SOURCE].
147
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting an External Monitor
Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputer
analogimageyou’reprojecting.
NOTE:
• Daisychainconnectionisnotpossible.
• Whenaudioequipmentisconnected,theprojectorspeakerisdisabled.
Computer
cable (VGA)
(supplied)
Stereo mini-plug audio cable
(not supplied)
Computer cable (VGA)
(not supplied)
148
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Your DVD Player or Other AV Equipment
ConnectingVideo/S-VideoInput
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet Buttonontheremotecontrol
VIDEOIN VIDEO (VIDEO)
S-VIDEOIN S-VIDEO (S-VIDEO)
NOTE:TheAUDIOINLandRjacks(RCA)aresharedbetweentheVideoandS-Videoinputs.
NOTE:RefertoyourVCRowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourequipment’svideooutputrequirements.
NOTE:AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindvia
ascanconverter.
Audio cable (not supplied)
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment
Audio cable (not supplied)
149
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting Component Input
 Acomponentsignalwillbeautomaticallydisplayed.Ifnot,fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→
[SIGNALSELECT]→[COMPUTER],andthenplaceacheckmarkintheComponentradiobutton.
• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.
Inputconnector SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet Buttonontheremotecontrol
COMPUTERIN COMPUTER (COMPUTER1)
NOTE:RefertoyourDVDplayer’sowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourDVDplayer’svideooutputrequirements.
Audio cable (not supplied)
15-pin - to - RCA (female)
× 3 cable adapter (ADP-
CV1E)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio
cable (not supplied)
Component video RCA × 3
cable (not supplied)
DVD player
Audio Equipment
150
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting HDMI Input
YoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourDVDplayer,harddiskplayer,Blu-rayplayer,ornotebooktypePCtothe
HDMIINconnectorofyourprojector.
NOTE:TheHDMI1IN/HDMI2INconnectorsupportsPlug&Play(DDC2B).
Audio cable (not supplied)
HDMIcable(notsupplied)
UseHighSpeedHDMI® Cable.
Inputconnector SOURCEbuttonontheprojector
cabinet Buttonontheremotecontrol
HDMI1IN HDMI1 HDMI
HDMI2IN HDMI2 HDMI
TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:
Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.
Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.
Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.
• WhenconnectingtheHDMI1IN(orHDMI2IN)connectoroftheprojectortotheDVDplayer,theprojector’svideo
levelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeDVDplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[HDMISETTINGS]
→[HDMI1](or[HDMI2])→[VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.
• IftheHDMIinputsoundcannotbeheard,inthemenuselect[AUDIOSELECT]→[HDMI1](or[HDMI2]).
151
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wired LAN (not supported by PE501X)
TheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.
TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[SETUP]→[WIREDLAN].
(→page120).
ExampleofLANconnection
ExampleofwiredLANconnection
LAN
Server
Hub
LAN cable (not supplied)
NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLAN
cable.
152
6. Installation and Connections
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (Optional: NP02LM series) (not supported by PE501X)
TheUSBWirelessLANUnitalsoprovidesawirelessLANconnection.TouseawirelessLANconnection,youare
requiredtoassignanIPaddresstotheprojector.
Important:
• IfyouusetheprojectorwiththeUSBWirelessLANUnitintheareawheretheuseofwirelessLANequipmentis
prohibited,removetheUSBWirelessLANUnitfromtheprojector.
• BuytheappropriateUSBWirelessLANUnitforyourcountryorarea.
NOTE:
• ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitashestoshowthattheUSBWirelessLANUnitisworking.
• Yourcomputer’swirelessLANadapter(orunit)mustbecompliedwithWi-Fi(IEEE802.11b/g/n)standard.
FlowofSettingWirelessLAN
Step 1: AttachtheUSBWirelessLANUnittotheprojector.
Step 2: ConnectthecomputertotheprojectorviawiredLAN.(→page151)
 Usethecomputer’sbrowsertodisplaytheprojector’sHTTPserver.(→page42)
Step 3: UseanHTTPservertosetthewirelessLAN.(→page45)
 AccesstheHTTPserverfunctiontoset[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[SETTINGS]→[WIRELESS]→
[EASYCONNECTION],[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT],[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].
NOTE:
• TousetheHTTPserverfunction,theprojectormustbeconnectedtoanetwork.
 FirstusethewiredLANtoconnecttheprojectortoanetworkandthenusetheHTTPservertosetthewirelessLAN.
• AftersettingthewirelessLANbyusingtheHTTPserver,set[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[SETTINGS]→[WIRED]→[DISABLE]
WhenswitchingtosetontheprojectorafterconnectingtothewirelessLAN:
UsethemenutosetthewirelessLANconnectionfortheprojector.
(→page120)
Select[DISABLE],[EASYCONNECTION],[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT],[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]yousetfromthe
HTTPserver.
AttachingtheUSBWirelessLANUnit
NOTE:
• TheUSBWirelessLANUnitmustbeinsertedintotheUSBWirelessLANUnitportinthecorrectdirection.Itcannotbeinserted
inthereversedirection.IftheUSBWirelessLANUnitisinsertedinthereversedirectionwithexcessiveforceapplied,theUSB
portmaybreak.
• BeforetouchingtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,touchametallicobject(suchasadoorknoboraluminumwindowframe)todischarge
thestaticelectricityfromyourbody.
• AlwaysinsertorremovetheUSBWirelessLANunitwhenthemainpoweristurnedoff.Failuretodosomaycauseprojector
malfunctionordamagetotheUSBwirelessLANunit.Iftheprojectorwillnotworkcorrectly,turnofftheprojector,disconnect
thepowercord,andthenconnectitagain.
• DonotinsertotherUSBdevicesintotheUSBWirelessLANunitport.DonotinserttheUSBWirelessLANunitintotheUSB(PC)
port(TypeB).
• AlthoughthePE501XdoesnotsupportwirelessLAN,awirelessmark( )isshownonthecabinet.
153
6. Installation and Connections
PrepareaPhillipsscrewdriverbeforehand.
1. PressthePOWERbuttontoturnofftheprojectorandsetit
intostandbycondition,anddisconnectthepowercord.
2. RemovetheUSB(LAN)portcover.
Loosen the screw securing the port cover.
 •Thescrewisnotremovable.
3. SlowlyinserttheUSBWirelessLANUnitintotheUSB(LAN)
port.
Remove the cap from the USB Wireless LAN Unit, and then insert
it with the surface (side of indicator) facing outward. Keep the cap
for later use.
NOTE:DonotforcetoinserttheUSBWirelessLANUnit.
4. PuttheUSB(LAN)portcoverbackintoplace.
 InsertthecatchoftheUSB(LAN)portcoverintothegrooveofthe
projector cabinet, and then tighten the screw to secure the port
cover.
ToremovetheUSBWirelessLANUnit,disconnectthepowercord
andusetheaboveprocedure.
NOTE:
• ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitashestoshowthatWireless
LANUnitisworking.IftheUSBWirelessLANUnitisincorrectlyattached,
theblueLEDwillnotash.
• DonotpressthebuttonontheUSBWirelessLANUnit.Thebuttonwillnot
workwiththismodel.
1
2
154
6. Installation and Connections
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection
(NetworkType→Infrastructure)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless
LAN function
Wired LAN
Wireless access point
USB Wireless LAN Unit
To enabledirect communication(i.e.,peer-to-peer)betweenpersonalcomputers andprojectors,youneedto
selecttheAdHocmode.
UsetheHTTPserverfunctiontomakethesettings.(→page42)
PC with wireless
LAN card inserted
PC with built-in wireless
LAN function
UsetheHTTPserverfunctiontomakethesettings.(→page42)
ExampleofwirelessLANconnection(NetworkType→AdHoc)
USB Wireless LAN Unit
155
6. Installation and Connections
Attaching the Optional Cable Cover (NP03CV)
Anoptionalcablecover(NP03CV)isavailableforhidingcables.
TheNP03CVcablecoverisdesignedforusewiththePseriesprojectors.
CAUTION:
• Besuretotightenthescrewsafterattachingthecablecover.Failuretodosomaycausethecablecovertocome
offandfall,resultingininjuryordamagetothecablecover.
• Donotputbundledcablesinthecablecover.Failuretodosomaydamagethepowercord,resultingare.
Attachingthecablecover
Attachthecablecoverafterinstallingtheprojectorontheceilingandconnectingcables.
Toolneededforattaching:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
1. Aligntwotabsontheoutsideofthecablecoverwithgroovesoftheprojectorandpushthetopend.
• Atthesametimetwotabsontheinsideofthecablecoverwillbeengagedintherespondinggroovesofthe
projector.
NOTE:
• Becarefulnottogetcablescaughtinbetweenthecablecoverandtheprojector.
2. Tightenthecablecoverscrews.
• Besuretotightenthescrews.
1
2
2
1
Tabs
Removingthecablecover
1. LoosenthecablecoverscrewsuntilthePhillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondition.
2. Removethecablecover.
Push up the cable cover slightly and rotate it to release.
1
1
2
156
1. Pushupthe buttonsonthe leftand rightto releasethe
lterunitandpullitout.
2. Removethelterunitbypullingoutthetab.
3. Removethefourlters.
(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion
filters (large and small).
Filter cover
Filter unit
7. Maintenance
Thissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthelters,thelens,thecabinet,
andtoreplacethelampandthelters.
❶ Cleaning the Filters
Theair-lterspongekeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojectorandshouldbefrequentlycleaned.Ifthelter
isdirtyorclogged,yourprojectormayoverheat.
NOTE:Themessageforltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageis
displayed,cleanthelters.Thetimetocleantheltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.
Tocancelthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.
Thetwo-layerlterontheprojectorimprovescoolinganddust-proofcapabilitiescomparedwiththeconventional
models.
Theoutsides(intakeside)oftherstandsecondlayerltersremovedust.
Tocleanthelter,detachthelterunitandtheltercover.
CAUTION
• Beforecleaningthelters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.
Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.
157
7. Maintenance
(2) Push the left end of each filter and remove the hard two
honeycomb filters (large and small).
 •Thelargeltercannotberemovedbypushingonitsright
end.
4. Useavacuumcleanertovacuumallthedustinside.
Get rid of dust in the accordion filter
NOTE:
• Wheneveryouvacuumthelter,usethesoftbrushattachmentto
vacuum.Thisistoavoiddamagetothelter.
• Donotwashthelterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinlterclog-
ging.
5. Removedustfromthelterunitandtheltercover.
Clean both outside and inside.
6. Attachthefourlterstothelterunit.
(1)Inserttheleftendofeachhardhoneycomblter(largeand
small) first and then the right end of each hard honeycomb
filter to the filter unit.
 •Thelargeltercannotbettedifitsrightendisinserted.
(2) Turn the filter unit over.
 •Attachthetwosoftaccordionlters(largeandsmall).Each
accordion filter has a slit on it. Align the slit with each pro-
trusion of the filter unit.
Slit
158
7. Maintenance
7. Putthelterunitbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Makesurethatthelterunitisplacedinthecorrectorienta-
tion.
8. Puttheltercoverbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Inserttwocatchesof thetopside ofthelter coverinto the
groove of the cabinet, and push the buttons on the left and right
to close the filter cover.
• Pushtheltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.
9. Clearthelterusagehours.
Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the
projector.
From the menu, select [RESET] →[CLEARFILTERHOURS].
(→ page 117)
The interval time to clean the filters is set to [OFF] at time of
shipment. When using the projector as it is, you do not clear
the filter usage
159
7. Maintenance
❷ Cleaning the Lens
• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.
• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.
• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.
❸ Cleaning the Cabinet
Turnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.
• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.
 Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.
• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.
• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuum
cleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.
Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.
• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.
• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourngersoranyhardobjects
• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.
NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproduct
inprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacenishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.
160
7. Maintenance
❹ Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Whenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatorinthecabinetwillblinkredandthemessage“THE
LAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMPANDFILTER.”willappear
(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,replacethelamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformance.After
replacingthelamp,besuretoclearthelamphourmeter.(→page117)
CAUTION
• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojector
offandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.
• Usethespeciedlampforsafetyandperformance.
 Toorderthereplacementlamp,specifyyourlamptype.
 Replacementlamp:
 NP23LP
 Thereplacementlampcomeswithlters.
• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexceptonelampcoverscrewandtwolamphousingscrews.Youcouldreceive
anelectricshock.
• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.
 Keepngerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingngerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcause
anunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.
• Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hours
afterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Ifthishappens,besuretoreplacethelamp.Ifyoucontinuetouse
thelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescattered
inthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishappens,contactyourNEC
dealerforlampreplacement.
*NOTE:Thismessagewillbedisplayedunderthefollowingconditions:
• foroneminuteaftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon
• whenthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed
Toturnoffthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.
Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:
• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)
• Replacementlamp
Flow of Replacing the Lamp and the Filters
Step 1. Replace the lamp
Step 2. Replace the filters (→page163)
Step 3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours(→page117)
161
7. Maintenance
2. Removethelamphousing.
(1)Loosenthetwoscrewssecuringthelamphousinguntilthephillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondi-
tion.
 •Thetwoscrewsarenotremovable.
 •Thereisaninterlockonthiscasetopreventtheriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempttocircumventthis
interlock.
(2)Removethelamphousingbyholdingit.
CAUTION:
Makesurethatthelamphousingiscoolenoughtobeforeremovingit.
Interlock
Toreplacethelamp:
1. Removethelampcover.
(1)Loosenthelampcoverscrew
 •Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.
(2)Pushandslidethelampcoveroff.
162
7. Maintenance
Thiscompletesthelampreplacement.
Goontothelterreplacement.
NOTE:Whenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife,theprojector
cannotturnonandthemenuisnotdisplayed.
Ifthishappens,presstheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.
Whenthelamptimeclockisresettozero,theLAMPindicatorgoesout.
4. Reattachthelampcover.
(1)Slidethelampcoverbackuntilitsnapsintoplace.
(2)Tightenthescrewtosecurethelampcover.
 •Besuretotightenthescrew.
3. Installanewlamphousing.
(1)Insertanewlamphousinguntilthelamphousingispluggedintothesocket.
(2)Pushthetopcenterofthelamphousingtosecureit.
(3)Secureitinplacewiththetwoscrews.
 •Besuretotightenthescrews.
163
7. Maintenance
Toreplacethelters:
Fourltersarepackagedwiththereplacementlamp.
Honeycomblter(coarsemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheoutsideofthelterunit)
Accordionlter(nemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheinsideofthelterunit)
NOTE:
• Replaceallfourltersatthesametime.
• Beforereplacingthelters,wipeoffdustanddirtfromtheprojectorcabinet.
• Theprojectorisprecisionequipment.Keepoutdustanddirtduringlterreplacement.
• Donotwashthelterswithsoapandwater.Soapandwaterwilldamagetheltermembrane.
• Putltersintoplace.Incorrectattachmentofaltermaycausedustanddirttogetintotheinsideoftheprojector.
Beforereplacingthelters,replacethelamp.(→page160)
1. Pushupthebuttonsontheleftandrighttoreleasethelterunitandpullitout.
Filter cover
2. Removethelterunitbypullingoutthetab.
Filter unit
3. Removethefourlters.
(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion filters (large and small).
164
7. Maintenance
(2) Push the left end of each filter and remove the hard two honeycomb filters (large and small).
 •Thelargeltercannotberemovedbypushingonitsrightend.
4. Removedustfromthelterunitandtheltercover.
Clean both outside and inside.
5. Attachfournewlterstothelterunit.
(1)Inserttheleftendofeachhardhoneycomblter(largeandsmall)rstandthentherightendofeachhard
honeycomb filter to the filter unit.
 •Thelargeltercannotbettedifitsrightendisinserted.
(2) Turn the filter unit over.
 •Attachthetwosoftaccordionlters(largeandsmall).Eachaccordionlterhasaslitonit.Aligntheslitwith
each protrusion of the filter unit.
6. Putthelterunitbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Makesurethatthelterunitisplacedinthecorrectorientation.
7. Puttheltercoverbacktotheprojectorcabinet.
 Inserttwocatchesofthetopsideoftheltercoverintothegrooveofthecabinet,andpushthebuttonsontheleft
and right to close the filter cover.
 Pushtheltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.
Thiscompletesthelterreplacement.
Goontotheclearinglampandlterhourmeters.
Toclearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours:
1. Placetheprojectorwhereyouuseit.
2. Plugthepowercordintothewalloutlet,andthenturnontheprojector.
3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthelterusagehours.
1. From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours.
2. Select[CLEARFILTERHOURS].andresetthelterusagehours.(→ page 117)
165
8. User Supportware
❶ Installing Software Program
Installation for Windows software
ThesoftwareprogramsexceptImageExpressUtilityLiteforMacOSandPCControlUtilityPro5supportWindows
8,Windows7,WindowsVista,andWindowsXP.
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8,Win-
dows7,WindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindows8,WindowsXPHomeEdition,andWindowsXPProfessional,
“Microsoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0,3.0or3.5isavailablefrom
Microsoft’swebpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer.
• ImageExpressUtilityLitewillbeinstalledtothesystemdriveofyourcomputer.
 Ifthemessage“Thereisnotenoughfreespaceondestination”isdisplayed,freeupenoughspace(about100MB)toinstallthe
program.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
166
8. User Supportware
2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
TIP:
UninstallingaSoftwareProgram
Preparation:
Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmust
have“Administrator”privilege(Windows8,Windows7,andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege
(WindowsXP).
•ForWindows7/WindowsVista
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”
 The“ProgramsandFeatures”windowwillbedisplayed.
3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.
4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.
 •Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
•ForWindowsXP
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.
 TheAdd/RemoveProgramswindowwillbedisplayed.
3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
167
8. User Supportware
Using on Mac OS
Step 1: Install Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS or PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the
computer.
1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.
 TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.
2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.
The CD-ROM window will be displayed.
3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.
4. Double-click“ImageExpressUtilityLite.dmg”or“PCControlUtility.mpkg”.
The installer will start.
5. Click“Next”.
 “ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.
6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.
The confirmation window will be displayed
7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.
Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation.
TIP:
•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram
1. Putthe“ImageExpressUtilityLite”or“PCControlUtilityPro5”foldertotheTrashicon.
2. PutthecongurationleofImageExpressUtilityLiteorPCControlUtilityPro5totheTrashicon.
• ThecongurationleofImageExpressUtilityLiteislocatedin“/Users/<yourusername>/Library/Preferences/
jp.necds.Image-Express-Utility-Lite.plist”.
• ThecongurationleofPCControlUtilityPro5islocatedin“/Users/<yourusername>/ApplicationData/NEC
ProjectorUserSupportware/PCControlUtilityPro5”.
168
8. User Supportware
❷ Using the Computer Cable (VGA) to Operate the Projector
(Virtual Remote Tool)
Usingtheutilitysoftware“VirtualRemoteTool”,VirtualRemotescreen(ortoolbar)canbedisplayedonyourcomputer
screen.
Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviathecomputercable
(VGA),serialcable,orLANconnection.OnlyviaserialorLANconnectionitisalsousedtosendanimagetothe
projectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfrom
changing.
ControlFunctions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremote
controloperationonyourPC.
VirtualRemotescreen
RemoteControlWindow Toolbar
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.
ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page172)
TIP:
• VirtualRemoteToolcanbeusedwithaLANandaserialconnection.
• ForupdateinformationonVirtualRemoteTool,visitourwebsite:
http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html
NOTE:
• When[COMPUTER]isselectedfromyoursourceselection,theVirtualRemotescreenorthetoolbarwillbedisplayedaswellas
yourcomputerscreen.
• Usethesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)toconnecttheCOMPUTERINconnectordirectlywiththemonitoroutputconnectorof
thecomputertouseVirtualRemoteTool.
 Usingaswitcherorothercablesthanthesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)maycausefailureinsignalcommunication.
 VGAcableconnector:
 PinNos.12and15arerequiredforDDC/CI.
• VirtualRemoteToolmaynotworkdependingonyourcomputer’sspecicationsandversionofgraphicadaptersordrivers.
• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions:
 (OnlyviaserialorLANconnection)
- Filesize:Lessthan1MB
- Imagesize(resolution):
 P501X/P451X/PE501X:Horizontal1024dots×vertical768dotsorless
 P451W/P401W:Horizontal1280dots×vertical800dotsorless
- Numberofcolors:256colorsorless
TIP:
• Theprojector’sCOMPUTERINconnectorsupportsDDC/CI(DisplayDataChannelCommandInterface).DDC/CIisastandard
interfaceforbidirectionalcommunicationbetweendisplay/projectorandcomputer.
169
8. User Supportware
Step 1: Install Virtual Remote Tool on the computer
NOTE:
• ToinstallVirtualRemoteTool,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows8,Windows7,Windows
VistaandWindowsXP).
• ExitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallingVirtualRemoteTool.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecom-
pleted.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
170
8. User Supportware
TIP:
UninstallingSoftwareProgram
Preparation:
Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave
“Administrator”privilege(Windows8,Windows7andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(Windows
XP).
•ForWindows7/WindowsVista
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”
 The“ProgramsandFeatures”windowwillbedisplayed.
3 Selectthesoftwareprogramandclickit.
4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.
 •Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
•ForWindowsXP
1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.
The Control Panel window will be displayed.
2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.
 TheAdd/RemoveProgramswindowwillbedisplayed.
3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.
Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.
Connect the projector to the computer
1 Usethesuppliedcomputercable(VGA)toconnecttheCOMPUTERINconnectoroftheprojectordirectly
withthemonitoroutputconnectorofthecomputer.
2 ConnectthesuppliedpowercordtotheACINoftheprojectorandthewalloutlet.
The projector is in the standby condition.
ACInput
Supplied computer cable (VGA)
→ To wall outlet
Power cord (supplied)
TIP:
• WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthersttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayedtonavigateyourconnections.
171
8. User Supportware
Start Virtual Remote Tool
Startusingtheshortcuticon
• Double-clicktheshortcuticon ontheWindowsDesktop.
StartfromtheStartmenu
• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]
→[VirtualRemoteTool].
 WhenVirtualRemoteToolstartsforthersttime,“EasySetup”windowwillbedisplayed.
Follow the instructions on the screens
 When“EasySetup”iscompleted,theVirtualRemoteToolscreenwillbedisplayed.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathecomputer
cable(VGA)ornetwork(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawireless
LANconnection.
TIP:
• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window.
 Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreenatStep6in“EasySetup”.
172
8. User Supportware
ExitingVirtualRemoteTool
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon ontheTaskbar.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click“Exit”.
The Virtual Remote Tool will be closed.
ViewingthehelpleofVirtualRemoteTool
•Displayingthehelpleusingthetaskbar
1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
2. Click“Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
•DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and
then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.
The Help screen will be displayed.
173
8. User Supportware
❸ Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image or Video from
the Projector over a LAN (Image Express Utility Lite) (not
supported by PE501X)
UsingImageExpressUtilityLitecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROMallowsyoutosendthecomputer’s
screenimagetotheprojectoroveraUSBcableorawiredorwirelessLAN.
ImageExpressUtilityLiteisaprogramcompatiblewithWindows.
ImageExpressUtilityLiteforMacOSisaprogramcompatiblewithMacOS.(→page179)
ThissectionwillshowyouanoutlineabouthowtoconnecttheprojectortoaLANandtouseImageExpressUtility
Lite.FortheoperationofImageExpressUtilityLite,seethehelpofImageExpressUtilityLite.
Step1:installImageExpressUtilityLiteonthecomputer.
Step2:ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN.
Step3:StartImageExpressUtilityLite.
TIP:
• ImageExpressUtilityLite(forWindows)canbestartedfrommostcommerciallyavailableremovablemediasuchasUSBmemory
devicesorSDcardswithouttheneedtoinstallonyourcomputer.(→page178)
What You can Do with Image Express Utility Lite
•Imagetransmission(forWindowsandMacOS)
• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttotheprojectorviaawiredorwirelessnetworkwithoutacomputercable
(VGA).
• Byusing“EASYCONNECTION”function,thecomplicatednetworksettingscanbesimpliedandthecomputer
willautomaticallyconnecttotheprojector.
• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttouptofourprojectorsatthesametime.
•Audiotransfercapability(forWindowsonly)
• ImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendthecomputer’sscreenimageandaudiototheprojectoroverwired/
wirelessLANorUSBconnection.
• Audiotransfercapabilityisavailableonlywhen thecomputerconnectswiththeprojectorinpeer-to-peer net-
work.
•Playingstreamingvideo(forWindowsonly)
• ImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendstreamingvideofromthecomputertoasingleprojectoroverwired
orwirelessLANwithouttheneedofconnectingacomputercable.Forlistofsupportedmovielesandplayback
requirements,seepage59of“4.UsingtheViewer”.
•USBDisplay(forWindowsonly)
• Computer’sscreenimageandaudiocanbeprojectedviaaUSBcable,withoutconnectingacomputercable
(VGA).
• JustconnectingthecomputerandtheprojectoroveraUSBcablewillmaketheUSBDisplayfunctionavailable
(Plug&Play)evenwithoutinstallingImageExpressUtilityLiteonthecomputer.(→page40)
•GeometricCorrectionTool[GCT](forWindowsonly)
See“❹ Projectingan ImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolin ImageExpress UtilityLite)”. (→page
180)
NOTE:
• WhenImageExpressUtilityLiteisused,theaudiofromtheCOMPUTERAUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)maynotbesynchro-
nizedwiththevideo.
174
8. User Supportware
Using on Windows
Step 1: install Image Express Utility Lite on the computer.
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalltheprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,WindowsVista
andWindowsXP).
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
• ImageExpressUtilityLitewillbeinstalledtothesystemdriveofyourcomputer.
 Ifthemessage“Thereisnotenoughfreespaceondestination”isdisplayed,freeupenoughspace(about100MB)toinstallthe
program.
1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7:
1.Click“start”onWindows.
2.Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. TypeyourCD-ROMdrivename(example:“Q:\”)and“LAUNCHER.EXE”in“Name”.(example:Q:\LAUNCH-
ER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
The menu window will be displayed.
2. Click“InstallingImageExpressUtilityLite”onthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
 “ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.
 Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”carefully
3. Ifyouagree,click“Iagree.”andthenclick“Next”.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
• Whentheinstallationiscomplete,youwillreturntothemenuwindow.
When the installation is complete, a completion message will be displayed.
4. Click“OK”.
This completes the installation.
TIP:
•UninstallingImageExpressUtilityLite
TouninstallImageExpressUtilityLite,dothesameproceduresstatedasin“UninstallingVirtualRemoteTool”.Read“VirtualRemote
Tool”as“ImageExpressUtilityLite”(→page170)
175
8. User Supportware
Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page152)and“9.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsingan
HTTPBrowser”(→page42)
Step 3: Start Image Express Utility Lite.
1. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ImageExpressUtility
Lite”→“ImageExpressUtilityLite”.
 ImageExpressUtilityLitewillstart.
 Theselectwindowfornetworkconnectionwillbedisplayed
2. SelectNetworkandclick“OK”.
The select window for destination will show a list of connectable projectors.
• Whenconnectingthecomputerdirectlytotheprojectorbyone-to-one,“EasyConnection”isrecommended.
• Whenoneormorenetworksfor“EASYCONNECTION”arefound,the“EasyConnectionSelectionScreen”
windowwillbedisplayed.
• Tocheckforthenetworkavailableforconnectedprojectors,fromthemenu,select[INFO.]→[WIRELESS
LAN]→[SSID].
3. Selectthenetworkyouwishtoconnect,andclick“Select”.
The target selection window will be displayed.
4. Placeacheckmarkforprojectorstobeconnected,andthenclick“Connect”.
• Whenoneormoreprojectorsaredisplayed,fromthemenuontheprojector,select[INFO.]→[WIRELESSLAN]
→[IPADDRESS].
When connecting with the projector is established, you can operate the control window to control the projector. (→
page 41, 176)
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]or[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorthatisturned
offwillnotbedisplayedintheselectwindowfordestination.
176
8. User Supportware
5. Operatethecontrolwindow.
(1) (Streaming) Displays the streaming window� Movie files on the PC can be transferred to the projector via the network
and played on the projector� Refer to “Movie streaming function” in the help file of Image Express Utility
Lite�
(2) (Source) ����� Selects an input source of the projector�
(3) (Picture) ���� Turns on or off AV-MUTE (Picture mute), and turns on or off FREEZE (Freeze a picture)�
(4) (Sound) ����� Turns on or off AV-MUTE (Sound mute), play the sound and turns up or down the volume�
(5) (Others) ����� Uses “Update”, “HTTP Server”*, “Settings” and “Information”� (not supported by PE501X)
* The HTTP Server cannot be selected when a USB cable is connected�
(6) (Exit) ���������� Exit Image Express Utility Lite� You can also turn off the projector at the same time�
(7) (Help) ����������� Displays the help of Image Express Utility Lite�
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)(7) (6)
177
8. User Supportware
TIP:
Viewingthe“Help”leofImageExpressUtilityLite
• DisplayingtheHelpleofImageExpressUtilityLitewhileitisrunning.
 Clickthe[?](help)icononthecontrolwindow.
The Help screen will be displayed.
• DisplayingtheHelpleofGCTwhileitisrunning.
 Click“Help”→“Help”ontheeditwindow.
The Help screen will be displayed.
• DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
 Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ImageExpressUtilityLite”
→“ImageExpressUtilityLiteHelp”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
178
8. User Supportware
Starting Image Express Utility Lite from a USB Memory or SD Card
ImageExpressUtilityLitecanbestartedfromcommerciallyavailableremovablemediasuchUSBmemoryorSDcards
ifitiscopiedbeforehand.ThiswilleliminatethetroubleofinstallingImageExpressUtilityLitetoyourcomputer.
1. CopyImageExpressUtilityLitetoremovablemedia.
 Copyallthefoldersandles(totalsizeapprox.6MB)fromthe“IEU_Lite(removable-media)”folderinthesupplied
NEC Projector CD-ROM to the root directory of your removable media.
2. Insertyourremovablemediaintoyourcomputer.
 The“AutoPlay”screenwillbedisplayedonyourcomputer.
TIP:
• Ifthe“AutoPlay”screenisnotdisplayed,openthefolderfrom“Computer”(“MyComputer”forWindowsXP).
3. Click“Openfoldertoviewles”
 TheIEU_Lite.exe,otherfolder,andleswillbedisplayed.
4. Double-clickthe“IEU_Lite.exe”( ) icon.
 ImageExpressUtilityLitewillstart.
NOTE:
• The“EASYCONNECTION”functionisnotsupportedwhenImageExpressUtilityLiteisstartedfromremovablemedia.
179
8. User Supportware
Using on Mac OS
Step 1: Install Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS on the computer
1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.
 TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.
2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.
The CD-ROM window will be displayed.
3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.
4. Double-click“ImageExpressUtilityLite.dmg”.
 The“ImageExpressUtilityLite”windowwillbedisplayed.
5. Draganddropthe“ImageExpressUtilityLite”foldertoyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.
Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page152)and“❾ControllingtheProjectorbyUsingan
HTTPBrowser”(→page42)
Step 3: Start Image Express Utility Lite for Mac OS
1. OpenyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.
2. Double-clickthe“ImageExpressUtilityLite”folder.
3. Double-clickthe“ImageExpressUtilityLite”icon.
 WhenImageExpressUtilityLiteforMacOSstarts,theselectwindowfordestinationwillbedisplayed.
• Atthersttime ofstartup,“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayedbeforetheselect
window for destination is displayed.
 Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andselect“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”,andclick
“OK”.
4. Selectaprojectortobeconnected,andthenclick“Connect”.
 Yourdesktopscreenwillbedisplayedontheprojector.
TIP:
ViewingtheHelpofImageExpressUtilityLiteforMacOS
• Fromthemenubar,click“Help”→“ImageExpressUtilityLiteHelp”whileImageExpressUtilityisrun-
ning.
The Help screen will be displayed
180
8. User Supportware
❹ Projecting an Image from an Angle (Geometric Correction
Tool in Image Express Utility Lite) (not supported by PE501X)
TheGeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)functionallowsyoutocorrectdistortionofimagesprojectedevenfroman
angle.
What you can do with GCT
• TheGCTfeatureincludesthefollowingthreefunctions
• 4-pointCorrection:Youcantaprojectedimagewithintheborderofthescreeneasilybyalignthefourcorners
ofanimagetotheonesofthescreen.
• Multi-pointCorrection:Youcancorrectadistortedimageonthecornerofawallorirregularshapedscreen
byusingmanyseparatedscreenstocorrecttheimageaswellas4-pointCorrection.
• Parameters Correction:Youcancorrectadistortedimagebyusingacombinationoftransformationalrules
preparedinadvance.
Thissectionwillshowanexampleforusewith4-pointCorrection.
Forinformationabout“Multi-pointCorrection”and“ParametersCorrection”,seethehelpleofImageExpress
UtilityLite.(→page177, 179)
• Yourcorrectiondatacanbestoredintheprojectororyourcomputerwhichcanberestoredwhennecessary.
• TheGCTfunctionisavailablewithaUSBcable,wiredorwirelessLANconnection,andvideocable.
Projecting an Image from an Angle (GCT)
ThissectionwillshowanexampleforusewithUSBDisplay(usingaUSBcabletoconnectacomputerandthepro-
jector).
• TheUSBDisplayfunctionwillautomaticallydisplaythecontrolwindow
• ForavideocableorLANconnection,installandstartImageExpressUtilityLiteinyourcomputerbeforehand.(→
page173)
Preparation:Adjusttheprojectorpositionorthezoomsothattheprojectedimagecancoverthewholescreenarea.
1. Clickthe“ ”(Picture)iconandthenthe“ ”button.
 The“4-pointCorrection”windowwillbedisplayed.
2. Clickthe“StartCorrection”buttonandthen“Start4-pointCorrection”button.
A green frame and a mouse pointer ( ) will be displayed.
• Four[•]markswillbeappearedatfourcornersofthegreenframe
181
8. User Supportware
3. Usethemousetoclickthe[•]markofwhichcorneryouwishtomove.
The currently selected [ •]markwillturnred.
(Intheaboveexample,Windowsscreensareomittedforclarication.)
4. Dragtheselected[•]marktothepointyouwishtocorrectanddropit.
• Whenyouclicksomewherewithintheprojectimagearea,thenearest[•]markwillgotothepositionwhere
the mouse cursor is.
5. RepeatStep3and4tocorrectthedistortionoftheprojectedimage.
6. Aftercompleting,right-clickthemouse.
The green frame and the mouse pointer will disappear from the projected image area. This will complete the cor-
rection.
7. Clickthe“X”(close)buttononthe“4-pointCorrection”window.
 The“4-pointCorrection”windowwilldisappearandthe4-pointcorrectionwilltakeeffect.
8. Clickthe“ ”buttononthecontrolwindowtoexittheGCT.
TIP:
• Afterperformingthe4-pointcorrection,youcansavethe4-pointcorrectiondatatotheprojectorbyclicking“File”→“Exportto
theprojector…”onthe“4-pointCorrection”window.
• SeetheHelpofImageExpressUtilityLiteforoperating“4-pointCorrection”windowandotherfunctionsthanGCT.(→page177,
179)
182
8. User Supportware
❺ Projecting Images from the Projector over a LAN (Image
Express Utility 2.0) (not supported by PE501X)
What you can do with Image Express Utility 2.0
• UsingImageExpressUtility2.0allowsyoutosendthescreensofyourcomputerstotheprojectorviawired/wire-
lessLAN.
 ThedifferencefromImageExpressUtilityLiteisthatprojectedimagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonly
oneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.
 When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandreceivedbetweentwoormorecomputers.
• High-speed,high-qualityimagetransmissionsbasedonNEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithm
 NEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithmallowshigh-qualityimagestobesentoverthenetworkathighspeed,from
yourcomputertotheprojector.
• Simultaneousprojectionbymultipleprojectors
 Imagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesame
time.
• “EasyConnection”functionforconnectingwirelessLAN
 Byusing“EasyConnection”function*1,thecomplicatedsettingofwirelessLANcanbesimplied.
*1 ThisfunctioncanbeusedwhenWindowsXPisusedastheOSandwhenyouhavea“ComputerAdminis-
trator”privilege.IftheOSisWindows7/WindowsVista,inputoflogonpasswordas“Administrator”maybe
prompted.
183
8. User Supportware
• Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtocomputers.
 When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesenttothecomputersofalltheparticipants(attendants)
ofa“Meeting”.Thereceivedimagescanbesavedtoyourcomputerwithamemo(textdata)attached.
Presenter
Attendant
Attendant
Attendant
• 1-clickswitchingofpresenter
 Whenswitchingtoanotherpresenterduringtheconference,theparticipants(attendants)cansimplyclickabutton
toswitchovertothenewpresenter.
• Centralmanagementoftheprojectingcomputer
 UsingtheTrainingModeallowsyoutouseasinglecomputer(Manager)tomanagewhichcomputer(Attendant)
projects.Possibleoperationincludesswitchingprojectingcomputerstoprojectfrom,aswellastemporarilytermi-
natingcommunicationwiththeprojector.
Attendant D (presenter)
Manager
Attendant B Attendant C
Mr� D, please start
your presentation�
Attendant A
NOTE::
TheTrainingModeisnotinstalledviathe“Typical”installationoptionwhenImageExpressUtility2.0isinstalled.
TouseTrainingMode,select“Extension”installationoptionontheinstallselectionscreenthatisdisplayedwhileImageExpress
Utility2.0installationisinprogress,andselect“TrainingMode(Attendant)”or“TrainingMode(Manager)”.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page152)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page118)
184
8. User Supportware
Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2.0
ThissectionexplainsthefollowingthreecasesasexamplesofoperatingImageExpressUtility2.0.
(1)Transferringimagestotheprojector
(2)Holdingaconference
(3)Participatinginaconference
SendingImagestoProjector
•Connectingprojector
1 TurnonthepowertotheprojectorforwhichLANhasbeenset.
2 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowwillbedisplayed.
 Alistofthenetworkequipmentconnectedtoyourcomputerwillbedisplayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
3 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
 Selectthenetworkdevicedisplaying“EasyConnection”iftheproductLANsettingisfor“EasyConnection.”This
willcallupthe“ProjectorList”window.
185
8. User Supportware
4 Check( )theprojectortoconnectandclick[Connect].
 Ifthenameoftheprojectortoconnectisnotonthelistorifitishidden,click[Update].
4-1
4-2
Click
Click
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
 Atthistime,theinputsignaloftheprojectorwillautomaticallychangeto“NETWORK”.
•Transferringimages
Whenyourcomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thescreenofthecomputerisprojectedfromtheprojectorasis.To
makeyourpresentationbyusingaPowerPointle,openthePowerPointleandstartyourpresentation.
186
8. User Supportware
•Stoppingorresumingthetransmissionofimages
Thetransmissionofthescreenofthecomputertotheprojectorcanbetemporarilystoppedandthenresumed.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[StopSending].
 Theprojectoricononthetaskbarwillchange( → ).
NOTE:
Evenifthescreenofthecomputerischangedinthisstatus,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectordoesnotchange.
Tomanipulatethescreenthatshouldnotbedisclosed(projectedfromtheprojector),stoptransmission.
3 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
4 Click[StartSending].
 Theprojectoricononthetaskbarwillchange( → ).
The transmission of the screen for the computer will be resumed, and the current screen of the computer will be
projected from the projector.
•Endthetransmissionofimages
ExitImageExpressUtility2.0.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Click[Exit].
187
8. User Supportware
HoldingConferences
•Holdingconferences
1 Followsteps1through4in“Connectingprojector”of“SendingImagestoProjector”(→page184).
The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.
•Disclosealetotheparticipantsoftheconference.
NOTE:
Todisclosealetotheparticipants,selectioncanbemadeonlyinfolderunits.
Therefore,afolderonlyhavinglesthatcanbedisclosedtotheparticipantsmustbecreatedinadvance.
1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.
A pop-up menu will be displayed.
2 Beforeclicking[SendtoPCandProjector],checkthatthereisa“•”markapplied.
3 Clickthe[ImageExpressUtility2.0]buttononthetaskbar.
The presenter window will be opened.
4 Click[SelectFolder].
4
Click
188
8. User Supportware
5 Selectafoldersavingtheletobedisclosedtotheparticipants,andclick[OK].
The file in the selected folder will be displayed in the list of files to transfer.
6 Click[Download].
The file will be shown to the participants.
NOTE:
Whenthecomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thecomputerscreenthatisinofbeingprogressisalsoprojectedfromtheprojec-
tor.Tomanipulateascreenthatshouldnotbeshown(notprojected),temporarilystopthetransmission(→page186).
•Endingconference
1 Click[File]inthepresenterwindow,andclick[Exit].
 Youcanalsoendtheconferencebyclicking[×]attheupperrightofthepresenterwindow.
ParticipatinginConference
•Participatinginconferences
1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]
→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowwillbedisplayed.
 Alistofthenetworkequipmentconnectedtoyourcomputerwillbedisplayed.
IMPORTANT:
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
2 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].
 Selectthenetworkdevicedisplaying“EasyConnection”iftheproductLANsettingisfor“EasyConnection.”This
willcallupthe“MeetingList”window.
189
8. User Supportware
3 ClicktheMeetingNametoparticipate,andclick[Connect].
3
Click
The computer will be connected to the selected conference and the attendant window will be displayed.
 Ifthepresenterselects“SendtoPCAndProjector”,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectorisdisplayedintheat-
tendant window.
190
8. User Supportware
•Savingreceivedimages
1 Click[Memo]intheattendantwindow.
A memo pane will be displayed.
2
1
Click
Memo pane
Click
2 Click[SaveImage]intheattendantwindow.
The image displayed in the attendant window will be saved.
• Thesavedimageisaddedtothememolistandathumbnailisdisplayed.
• Amemocanbeattachedtothesavedimage.
REFERENCE:
• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
createdfolder.
 Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
 Inthisfolder,anHTMLlenamed“MeetingRecords”iscreated.
 Thesavedimageissavedin“Images”folder.
191
8. User Supportware
•Downloadingdisclosedle
1 Click[FileTransfer]intheattendantwindow.
 The“FileTransfer”windowwillbeopened.
1
Click
2 Selectaletodownload,andclick[Download].
Downloading will begin.
The progress of the downloading is displayed at the lower left of the window.
3 Whendownloadingiscomplete,click[File]inthe“FileTransfer”window,andclick[Exit].
 The“FileTransfer”windowwillbeclosed.
REFERENCE:
• If“OpenAfterDownloading”ischecked,theleisopenedbyspeciedWindowsapplicationsoftwareafterdownloadingiscom-
plete.
• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedleissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows
7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedle.
• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoaleinthe
createdfolder.
 Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\
ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.
192
8. User Supportware
•Changingpresenter
Threetypesofsettingsmaybemadetochangethepresenter:“NotApproved”,“Approved”,and“ChangingProhibited”
(thesecanbeselectedonlybythepresenter).
Inthefollowingexample,“NotApproved”isselected.
• Click[BecomeAPresenter]intheattendantwindow.
You will change from a participant to a presenter.
1
Click
•Leavingconference
LeavetheconferenceandexitImageExpressUtility2.0.
• Click[File]intheattendantwindow,andclick[Exit].
 Youcanalsoleavetheconferencebyclicking[×]attheupperrightoftheattendantwindow.
193
8. User Supportware
❻ Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer over a LAN
(Desktop Control Utility 1.0) (not supported by PE501X)
UsingDesktopControlUtility1.0allowsyoutoremotelyoperateyourcomputerplacedatadistancefromtheprojector
overanetwork(wiredLANorwirelessLAN).
What you can do with Desktop Control Utility 1.0
• AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnectedtotheprojectortooperatethecomputer.
• Suppose,forexample,aPowerPointletobepresentedinaconferenceissavedtoacomputerinyourofce.Ifthis
computerisconnectedtotheprojectorintheconferenceroomwithLANwhentheconferenceisheld,thedesktop
screenofthecomputerinyourofce(Windows8/Windows7/WindowsVista/WindowsXP)canbeprojectedand
thePower-Pointlecanbepresentedbyoperatingtheprojector.Inotherwordsthecomputerdoesnotneedtobe
broughtintotheconferenceroom.
IMPORTANT:
• YoucanusetheDesktopControlUtility1.0tooperateacomputerlocatedinaseparateroomfromtheprojectoroveranetwork.
Therefore,caremustbeexercisedtopreventanythirdpartyfromviewingthescreenofyourcomputer(importantdocuments),
copyingles,orturningoffthepower.
 NECassumesnoliabilityforanylossordamagesarisingfrominformationleakorsystemfailurewhileyouareusingDesktop
ControlUtility1.0.
• ThiswilldisconnectLANconnectionwhenthecomputergoesinthestandbymodewhiletheDesktopControlUtility1.0isbeing
used.
 IntheWindows8/Windows7/WindowsVista,select[ControlPanel]→[HardwareandSound]→[PowerOptions].Set[Change
whenthecomputersleeps]to[Never].
In the Windows XP, click [Control Panel] → [Performance and Maintenance] → [Power Options] → [System Standby] →
[Never].
• ThescreensaverfunctionisoffwhileDesktopControlUtility1.0isrunning.
Connecting the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page152)and“9ApplicationMenus”(→page118)
194
8. User Supportware
Using the projector to operate your computer’s desktop screen
IMPORTANT:
• IncaseofWindows8/Windows7/WindowsVista,disabletheuseraccountcontrolbeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0.
 WindowsVistahas“UserAccountControl”functiontoprotectthecomputer.Theuseraccountconrmationwindowmaybe
displayed.
 SinceDesktopControlUtility1.0cannottransfertheuseraccountconrmationwindow,thiswindowmakestheoperationun-
available.BeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0,itisnecessarytodisabletheuseraccountcontrolofWindows8/Windows7/
WindowsVista.Afterloggingonwiththeadministratoraccount,followtheprocedurebelowtochangethesetting:
[ChangeProcedure]
<ForWindows8/Windows7>
1 Click[ControlPanel].
2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety](Windows8only).
3 Click[UserAccounts].
4 Click[ChangeUserAccountControlsettings].
5 Change[Choosewhentobenotiedaboutchangestoyourcomputer]to[Nevernotify]andclick[OK].
• Ifrestartingisrequested,click[Restartnow].
<ForWindowsVista>
1 Click[ControlPanel]fromtheStartMenu.
2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety].
3 Click[UserAccount].
4 Click[Enable/DisableUserAccountControl].
5 Remove the checkmark for [Use User Account Control (UAC) to Help Computer Protection] and click
[OK].
• Ifrebootingisrequested,click[RebootNow].
UponcompletionofDesktopControlUtility,itisrecommendedtoenabletheuseraccountcontrol.
195
8. User Supportware
•Operationoncomputer
1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[DesktopControlUtility
1.0]→[DesktopControl],inthatorder.
 The“SelectionOfNetworkConnections”windowisdisplayed.
 Thisdisplaysalistofthenetworkdevicesconnectedtothecomputeryouareusing.
2 Selectthenetworkdevicetouseandclick[OK].
 The“Startuppasswordsettings”windowwillbedisplayed.
• IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,theUserAccountControlWindowisdisplayed.Click[OK]orinputthe
administrator password.
ScreenwhenDesktopControlUtility1.0isstartedrsttime
already
Screen if starting password has been set
IMPORTANT:
• Besuretowritedownthestartingpasswordincaseyouforgetit.
• ThestartingpasswordmustbeinputeachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.
• Shouldyouforgetthestartingpassword,reinstalltheDesktopControlUtility1.0.
AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(or
later).
Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.
196
8. User Supportware
3 InputthestartingpasswordofDesktopControlUtility1.0,andclick[OK].
 The“Currentpassword”windowwillbedisplayed.
NOTE:
ThecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordeldvarieseachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.
4 Writedownthecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordeld.
 Writedown“PMHN”inthescreenexampleofstep3.
5 Click[OK].
 DesktopControlUtility1.0willbestarted.
Move to the room where the projector is installed, with the paper on which you have written down the password in
step 4.
197
8. User Supportware
•Operatingtheprojector(connectingcomputer)
1 ConnectaUSBmousethatiscommerciallyavailabletotheprojector.
USB
2 Turnonthepowertotheprojector.
Set the LAN setting of the projector in advance.
3 PresstheSOURCEbuttonontheprojectorunit.
The Source list will be displayed.
 Incaseoftheremotecontrol,presstheNETWORKbutton.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed,proceedtostep5.
4 PresstheSELECT▼/▲buttonstoselect[NETWORK],andthenpresstheENTERbutton.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed.
• TheremainingoperationscanbeperformedusingaUSBmouseconnectedtotheprojector.
198
8. User Supportware
5 Click[DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY].
 The“DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITYmenu”screenwillbedisplayed.
6 Click“ENTRY”.
A password input screen will be displayed.
7 Inputthepasswordyouhavewrittendowninstep4of“Operationoncomputer”.
• Clickthe[BS]buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]eldtodeletethecharactertotheleftofthecharacter
insertion point.
8 Afterinputtingthepassword,clickthe buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]eld.
 Youarereturnedtothe“DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY”menuscreen.
9 Click[COMPUTERSEARCH].
 The“COMPUTERLIST”screenwillbedisplayed.
 IftheconnectiondestinationhasnotbeenfoundasaresultofaCOMPUTERSEARCH,searchfortheconnection
destinationbyinputtingtheIPaddressofthecomputerattheconnectiondestination,click“InputIPAddress”.
199
8. User Supportware
10Clickthecomputerattheconnectiondestinationandthen[OK].
 Thedesktopscreenofthecomputerattheconnectiondestinationwillbedisplayed.
•Operatingtheprojector(manipulatingdesktopscreen)
ThedisplayeddesktopscreencanbemanipulatedbyusingtheUSBmouseconnectedtotheprojector.IftheEXIT
buttonoftheprojectororremotecontrolispressedwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed,anauxiliaryoperationbar
isdisplayedatthelowerleftofthescreen.
Manipulatetheauxiliaryoperationbarbyusingthebuttonsoftheprojectororremotecontrol.
200
8. User Supportware
<1> <2> <3> <4>
<1> (cut-off icon) �������Disconnects communication with the computer�
<2> (Shift icon) ����������When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, shift lock status is set�
The shift lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed
again�
<3> (Ctrl icon) ������������When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, control lock status is set�
The control lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed
again�
<4> (ESC icon) �����������The same operation as when the [ESC] key of the computer is pressed is performed� This icon is
used, for example, to stop a slideshow of PowerPoint�
•Operatingtheprojector(disconnectingcommunications)
1 PresstheEXITbuttonwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.
An auxiliary operation bar will be displayed at the lower left of the screen.
2 Movethehighlightto (cut-officon)andpresstheENTERbutton.
 Communicationwillbedisconnectedandyouarereturnedtothe“DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY”menuscreen.
 Toresumecommunication,click[COMPUTERSEARCH].
After that, follow step 10 on the preceding page.
REFERENCE:
Communicationcanalsobedisconnectedbyclickingtheprojectoricononthetaskbarandthenclicking“Disconnect”whilethe
desktopscreenisdisplayed.
201
8. User Supportware
•Operatingtheprojector(exitingDesktopControlUtility1.0)
1 Clicktheprojectoricon[ ]onthetaskbarwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.
2 Click[Exit].
 DesktopControlUtility1.0willbeterminated.
3 Press the EXIT button on the projector unit or on the remote control.
 The“networkmenu”screenwillbedisplayed.
4 Press the MENU button on the projector unit or on the remote control.
The on-screen menu will be displayed.
5 Selectaninputsourceotherthan[NETWORK].
202
8. User Supportware
❼
Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4/
Pro 5)
Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”or“PCControlUtilityPro5”includedonthecompanionNECPro-
jectorCD-ROM,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.
PCControlUtilityPro4isaprogramcompatiblewithWindows.(→thispage)
PCControlUtilityPro5isaprogramcompatiblewithMacOS.(→page205)
ControlFunctions
PowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotication,event
schedule.
ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4
ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.Forinformationonhowtouse
PCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.(→page204, 205)
Step1:InstallPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5onthecomputer.
Step2:ConnecttheprojectortoaLAN.
Step3:StartPCControlUtilityPro4/Pro5.
• TorunPCControlUtilityPro4onWindows8,WindowsXPHomeEditionandWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft
.NETFramework”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0,3.0or3.5isavailablefromMicrosoft’s
webpage.Downloadandinstalltheitonyourcomputer.
TIP:
• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.
• PE501XsupportsPCControlUtilityPro4onlywhentheprojectorisusedwithaserialconnection.
Using on Windows
Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 4 on the computer
NOTE:
• Toinstalloruninstalltheprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave[Administrator]privilege(Windows8,Windows7,
WindowsVistaandWindowsXP)
• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.
1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.
The menu window will be displayed.
203
8. User Supportware
TIP:
Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.
ForWindows7:
1. Click“start”onWindows.
2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.
3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\
LAUNCHER.EXE)
4. Click“OK”.
the menu window will be displayed.
2 Click“PCControlUtilityPro4”onthemenuwindow.
The installation will start.
When the installation is complete, the Welcome window will be displayed.
3 Click“Next”.
 “ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.
 Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”carefully.
4 Ifyouagree,click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”andthenclick“Next”.
• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.
• Whentheinstallationiscomplete,youwillreturntothemenuwindow.
TIP:
•UninstallingPCControlUtilityPro4
TouninstallPCControlUtilityPro4,dothesameproceduresstatedasin“UninstallingVirtualRemoteTool”.Read“VirtualRemote
Tool”as“PCControlUtilityPro4”(→page170)
204
8. User Supportware
Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN.
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page152)and“9.ControllingtheProjectorbyUsingan
HTTPBrowser”(→page42)
Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 4
Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→
“PCControlUtilityPro4”.
NOTE:
• FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/
sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthe
scheduler.
[Example]ForWindows7:
Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputer
tosleep”→“Never”.
NOTE:
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork
(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawireless
LANconnection.
TIP:
ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4
• DisplayingtheHelpleofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.
 Click“Help(H)”→“Help(H)…”ofwindowofPCControlUtilityPro4inthisorder.
The pop-up menu will be displayed.
• DisplayingthehelpleusingtheStartMenu.
 Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→
“PCControlUtilityPro4Help”.
The Help screen will be displayed.
205
8. User Supportware
Using on Mac OS
Step 1: Install PC Control Utility Pro 5 on the computer
1. InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMinyourMacCD-ROMdrive.
 TheCD-ROMiconwillbedisplayedonthedesktop.
2. Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.
The CD-ROM window will be displayed.
3. Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.
4. Double-click“PCControlUtility.mpkg”.
The installer will start.
5. Click“Next”.
 “ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”screenwillbedisplayed.
6. Read“ENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT”andclick“Next”.
The confirmation window will be displayed
7. Click“Iacceptthetermsinthelicenseagreement”.
Follow the instructions on the installer screens to complete the installation.
Step 2: Connect the projector to a LAN
ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page151),“Con-
nectingtoaWirelessLAN(Optional:NP02LMseries)”(→page152)and“❾ControllingtheProjectorbyUsingan
HTTPBrowser”(→page42)
Step 3: Start PC Control Utility Pro 5
1. OpenyourApplicationsfolderinMacOS.
2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.
3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”icon.
PC Control Utility Pro 5 will start.
NOTE:
• FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro5towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinsleepmode.
Select“EnergySaver”fromthe“SystemPreferences”inMacanddisableitssleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.
• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork
(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.
• When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawireless
LANconnection.
TIP:
ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro5
•DisplayingtheHelpleofPCControlUtilityPro5whileitisrunning.
• Fromthemenubar,click“Help”→“Help”inthisorder.
The Help screen will be displayed.
•DisplayingtheHelpusingtheDock
1. Open“ApplicationFolder”inMacOS.
2. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5”folder.
3. Clickthe“PCControlUtilityPro5Help”icon.
The Help screen will be displayed.
206
9. Appendix
❶ Troubleshooting
Thissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.
Indicator Messages
PowerIndicator
Indicator Condition ProjectorCondition Note
Off The main power is off –
Blinking light Blue 0�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on� Wait for a moment�
2�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled� –
Orange 2�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
On Timer is working� –
0�5 sec On,
0�5 sec Off
After cooling� –
Steady light Blue The projector is turned on� –
Orange [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE] –
Red [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY
MODE]
–
StatusIndicator
Indicator Condition ProjectorCondition Note
Off Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for
[STANDBY MODE])
–
Blinking light Red 1 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 2�5 sec Off)
Lamp cover error or lamp housing error Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing correctly�
2 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Temperature error The projector is overheated� Move the projector to
a cooler location�
3 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Power error Power unit is not working properly� Contact your
dealer�
4 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Fan error Fans will not work correctly�
6 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 0�5 sec Off)
Lamp error Lamp fails to light� Wait a full minute and then turn
on again�
Orange 1 cycle (0�5 sec
On, 2�5 sec Off)
Network conflict
Both the built-in wired LAN and the wireless LAN cannot
be connected to the same network at the same time�
To use both built-in wired LAN and wireless LAN at the
same time, connect them to different networks�
Green Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling
down�)
The projector is re-firing�
Wait for a moment�
Steadylight Green
Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
–
Orange CONTROL PANEL LOCK is on� You have pressed cabinet button when Control
Panel Lock is on�
CONTROL ID error Remote control ID and projector ID are not
matched�
Lamp Indicator
Indicator Condition ProjectorCondition Note
Off Normal –
Blinking light Red Lamp has reached its end of life� Lamp replace-
ment message will be displayed�
Replace the lamp�
Steady light Red Lamp has been used beyond its limit� The projector
will not turn on until the lamp is replaced�
Replace the lamp�
Green [ECO MODE] is set to [NORMAL] or [ECO] –
Over-TemperatureProtection
Ifthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorrisestoohigh,theover-temperatureprotectorwillautomaticallyturnoffthelamp
withtheSTATUSindicatorblinking(2-cycleOnandOff.)
Shouldthishappen,dothefollowing:
• Unplugthepowercordafterthecoolingfansstop.
• Movetheprojectortoacoolerlocationiftheroomwhereyouarepresentingisparticularlytoowarm.
• Cleantheventsiftheyarecloggedwithdust.
• Waitabout60minutesuntiltheinsideoftheprojectorbecomescoolenough.
207
9. Appendix
Common Problems & Solutions
(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage206.)
Problem CheckTheseItems
Does not turn on or
shut down
• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol
is on� (→ pages 14, 15)
• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 162)
• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufcientventilationaroundtheprojectororiftheroom
where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�
• Checktoseeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofits
life� If so, replace the lamp� After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used� (→ page 160)
• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.
• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1700meters
or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH
ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple
minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 108)
If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for
some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�
Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER]or[AUTOPOWEROFF]isoff.(→ page 103, 111)
No picture • UsetheCOMPUTER1,theCOMPUTER2,theVIDEOortheS-VIDEObuttonontheremotecontroltoselectyour
source (Computer, Video or S-Video)� (→ page 17) If there is still no picture, press the button again�
• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.
• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 95)
• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 5)
• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 117)
• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 33)
• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
the power to the notebook PC�
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before
being powered up�
* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver
or power management software�
• Seealsothenext page�
Picture suddenly
becomes dark
• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase,
lower the room temperature by turning down your air conditioner�
Color tone or hue is
unusual
• Checkifanappropriatecolorisselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 102)
• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 95)
Image isn’t square to
the screen
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 19)
• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 24)
Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 21)
• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 19)
• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens.
(→ page 143)
• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturnedon.
Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�
Flicker appears on
screen
• Set[FANMODE]tootherthan[HIGHALTITUDE]modewhenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500
feet/1700 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and
setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to
[AUTO]� (→ page 108)
Image is scrolling
vertically, horizontally
or both
• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported
by the projector� (→ page 214)
• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 97)
Remote control does
not work
• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 9)
• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.
• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 9)
Indicator is lit or blinking
• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 206)
Cross color in RGB
mode
• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 26)
• Adjustthecomputerimagemanuallywith[CLOCK]/[PHASE]in[IMAGEOPTIONS]inthemenu.(→ page 96)
Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.
208
9. Appendix
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.
• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.
 BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon
thepowertothenotebookPC.
 InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbefore
beingpoweredup.
NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,
thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→page114orgotonextstep)
• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.
 DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.
WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-
ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeon
oroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethrough
externaldisplayselections.
• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer
 IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayed
correctly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.Each
notebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.
Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.
• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMac
 WhenusingaMacwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)ac-
cordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacforthechangestotakeaffect.
 ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchon
aMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchto
the13"xedmodeandthenrestartyourMac.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthen
restarttheMacagain.
NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleInc.isneededforaMacBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pin
connector.
• MirroringonaMacBook
* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyour
MacBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMaccomputerformirroring.
• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacscreen
 Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApple
menuandarrangeicons.
209
9. Appendix
❷ Specifications
Thissectionprovidestechnicalinformationaboutprojector’sperformance.
Optical
ModelNumber NP-P501X NP-PE501X NP-P451X NP-P451W NP-P401W
LCDPanel 0.63inchLCDwithMicroLensArray(AspectRatio4:3) 0.59inchLCDwithMicroLensArray
(AspectRatio16:10)
Resolution*11024×768pixels(XGA) 1280×800pixels(WXGA)
Lens Manualzoomandfocus
ZoomRatio=1.7
F1.7–2.2 f=17.4–29.0mm
LensShift(Vertical) 0–0.5V 0–0.6V
Lamp 270WAC
(214WinNORMAL)
(163WinECO)
240WAC
(200WinNOR-
MAL)
(163WinECO)
270WAC
(214WinNOR-
MAL)
(163WinECO)
240WAC
(200WinNOR-
MAL)
(163WinECO)
LightOutput*2*35000 lumens 4500 lumens 4500 lumens 4000 lumens
NORMAL:80% NORMAL:83% NORMAL:80% NORMAL:83%
ECO:60%*4ECO:67%*4ECO:60%*4ECO:67%*4
ContrastRatio*3
(fullwhite:fullblack)
4000:1withDYNMICCONTRASTON
ImageSize(Diagonal) 25–300inches/0.64m–7.6m
ProjectionDistance
(Min.–Max.)
26–543inches/0.65–13.8m 27–573inches/0.69–14.6m
ProjectionAngle 0°–16.5°(wide)/0°–9.8°(tele)
*1 Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.
*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Ifanyothermodeisselectedasthe
[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.
*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2005
*4 ThemaximumpowerbecomesequivalenttopowerinNORMAL(ECOMODE).
Electrical
ModelNumber NP-P501X NP-PE501X NP-P451X NP-P451W NP-P401W
Inputs 1×RGB/Component(D-Sub15P),2×HDMITypeA(19P,HDMI®Connector)HDCPsupported*5,
1×S-Video(DIN4P),1×Video(RCA),1×(L/R)RCAAudio,1×StereoMiniAudio
Outputs 1×RGB(D-Sub15P),1×StereoMiniAudio
PCControl 1×PCControlPort(D-Sub9P)
WiredLANPort 1×RJ-45(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)(notsupportedbyPE501X)
WirelessLANPort
(Optional)
IEE802.11b/g/n(optionalUSBWirelessLANUnitrequired)(notsupportedbyPE501X)
USBPort 1×TypeA,1×TypeB
MICInput 1×MonauralMiniAudio(Dynamicmichrophoneonly;notsupportedbyplug-inmic)
ColorReproduction 10-bitsignalprocessing(1.07billioncolors)(VIEWER,NETWORK:Colors,16.7millioncolors)
CompatibleSignals*6Analog:VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/Quad-VGA/SXGA/SXGA+/WXGA+/WXGA++/UXGA/WSXGA+/HD/Full
HD/WUXGA/Mac13",16",21",23"
Component:480i/480p/576i/576p/720p/1080i/1080p
HDMI:VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/Quad-VGA/SXGA/SXGA+/WXGA+/WXGA++/WSXGA+/480p/576p/720p
/1080i/1080p
HorizontalResolution 540TVlines:NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60
300TVlines:SECAM
*5 HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP
 WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology?
 HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection(HDCP)isasystem
forpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraHigh-DenitionMultimediaInterface(HDMI).
 IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioningproperly.With
theimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayed
duetothedecision/intentionoftheHDCPcommunity(DigitalContentProtection,LLC).
 Video:DeepColor;8/10/12-bit,LipSync
 Audio:LPCM;upto2ch,samplerate32/44.1/48KHz,samplebit;16/20/24-bit
*6 Animagewithhigherorlowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution(P501X/P451X/PE501X:1024×768/P451W/
P401W:1280×800)willbedisplayedwithAdvancedAccuBlend.
210
9. Appendix
ModelNumber NP-P501X NP-PE501X NP-P451X NP-P451W NP-P401W
ScanRate*1Horizontal:15kHzto100kHz(RGB:24kHzorover)
Vertical:50Hzto120Hz(HDMI:50Hzto85Hz)
SyncCompatibility SeparateSync
Built-inSpeaker 16W(monaural)
PowerRequirement 100–240VAC,50/60Hz
InputCurrent 4.2A/1.7A 4.2A/1.7A 3.9A/1.6A 4.2A/1.7A 3.9A/1.6A
Power
Consump-
tion
(Typical
value)
ECO
MODE
OFF
374W(100-130V)/
357W(200-240V)
367W(100-130V)/
350W(200-240V)
341W(100-130V)/
325W(200-240V)
374W(100-130V)/
357W(200-240V)
341W(100-130V)/
325W(200-240V)
NORMAL 304W(100-130V)/
292W(200-240V)
296W(100-130V)/
283W(200-240V)
289W(100-130V)/
274W(200-240V)
304W(100-130V)/
292W(200-240V)
289W(100-130V)/
274W(200-240V)
ECO 260W(100-130V)/
248W(200-240V)
253W(100-130V)/
241W(200-240V)
260W(100-130V)/
248W(200-240V)
STANDBY
(NORMAL)
10W(100-130V/
200-240V)
7W(100-130V/
200-240V)
10W(100-130V/200-240V)
STANDBY
(NET-
WORK)
2.4W(100-130V)/2.8W(200-240V)
(TheNETWORKfunctionisnotsupportedbyPE501X.)
STANDBY
(POWER-
SAVING)
0.21W(100-130V)/0.43W(200-240V)
*1 Somescanratesarenotsupporteddependingontheresolutionofitsinputsignal.
Mechanical
ModelNumber NP-P501X NP-PE501X NP-P451X NP-P451W NP-P401W
Installation
Orientation
Desktop/Front,Desktop/Rear,Ceiling/Front,Ceiling/Rear
Dimensions 15.7"(W)×4.5"(H)×11.1"(D)/398mm(W)×115mm(H)×282mm(D)
(notincludingprotrusions)
Weight 9.1lbs/4.1kg 8.8lbs/4.0kg 9.1lbs/4.1kg
Environmental
Considerations
OperationalTemperatures:41°to104°F(5°to40°C),
(ECOmodeselectedautomaticallyat95°Fto104°F/35°Cto40°C)
20%to80%humidity(non-condensing)
StorageTemperatures:14°to122°F(-10°to50°C),
20%to80%humidity(non-condensing)
Operatingaltitude:0to2700m/8800feet(1700to2700m/5500to8800feet:Set[FANMODE]to[HIGH
ALTITUDE])
Regulations UL/C-ULApproved(UL60950-1,CSA60950-1)
MeetsDOCCanadaClassBrequirements
MeetsFCCClassBrequirements
MeetsAS/NZSCISPR.22ClassB
MeetsEMCDirective(EN55022,EN55024,EN61000-3-2,EN61000-3-3)
MeetsLowVoltageDirective(EN60950-1,TÜVGSApproved)
Foradditionalinformationvisit:
US:http://www.necdisplay.com/
Europe:http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/
Global:http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
Forinformationonouroptionalaccessories,visitourwebsiteorseeourbrochure.
Thespecicationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.
211
9. Appendix
71.8 (2.8)–76.5 (3)
398 (15.7)
115 (4.5)
282 (11.1)
11.5 (0.5)
175 (6.9)
24 (0.9)
33.8 (1.3)
130 (5.1)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
134 (5.3)
❸ Cabinet Dimensions
NP-P501X/NP-P451X/NP-P451W/NP-P401W
Unit:mm(inch)
Lens center
Lens center
Holes for ceiling mount
212
9. Appendix
NP-PE501X
71.8 (2.8)–76.5 (3)
398 (15.7)
115 (4.5)
282 (11.1)
11.5 (0.5)
175 (6.9)
24 (0.9)
33.8 (1.3)
130 (5.1)
150 (5.9)
200 (7.9)
134 (5.3)
Lens center
Lens center
Holes for ceiling mount
Unit:mm(inch)
213
9. Appendix
❹ Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector
Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
SignalLevel
Videosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)
Syncsignal:TTLlevel
51423
10
11 12 13 14 15
6978
Pin No. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal
1Red Cr
2GreenorSynconGreen Y
3Blue Cb
4Ground
5Ground
6RedGround CrGround
7 GreenGround YGround
8BlueGround CbGround
9 NoConnection
10 SyncSignalGround
11 NoConnection
12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA)
13 HorizontalSyncorComposite
Sync
14 VerticalSync
15 DataClock
COMPUTER IN
NOTE:PinNos.12and15arerequiredforDDC/CI.
214
9. Appendix
❺ Compatible Input Signal List
AnalogRGB
Signal Resolution
(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate
(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4:3 60/72/75/85/
iMac
SVGA 800 × 600 4:3 56/60/72/75/85/
iMac
XGA 1024 × 768 *14:3 60/70/75/85/
iMac
XGA+ 1152 × 864 4:3 60/70/75/85
WXGA 1280 × 768 *215:9 60
1280 ×800 *216:10 60
1360 × 768 *316:9 60
1366 × 768 *316:9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4:3 60/75
SXGA 1280 ×1024 5:4 60/75
SXGA+ 1400 ×1050 4:3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16:10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 *316:9 60
UXGA 1600 × 1200 *44:3 60/65/70/75
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16:10 60
HD 1280 × 720 16:9 60
FullHD 1920 × 1080 16:9 60
WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *516:10 60 *6
MAC13" 640 × 480 4:3 67
MAC16" 832 × 624 4:3 75
MAC19" 1024 × 768 4:3 75
MAC21" 1152 × 870 4:3 *375
MAC23" 1280 ×1024 5:4 65
Component
Signal Format AspectRatio RefreshRate
(Hz)
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16:9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
CompositeVideo/S-Video
Signal AspectRatio RefreshRate
(Hz)
NTSC 4:3 60
PAL 4:3 50
PAL60 4:3 60
SECAM 4:3 50
*1NativeresolutiononXGAmodel(P501X/P451X/PE501X)
*2NativeresolutiononWXGAmodel(P451W/P401W)
*3Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]
isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu.
 Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythese
signals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].
*4WXGAMODE:OFF
*5WXGAMODE:ON
*6RB(ReducedBlanking):upto154MHz
NOTE:
• Animagewithhigherorlowerresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution(P501X/P451X/PE501X:1024×768/P451W/
P401W:1280×800)willbedisplayedwithAdvancedAccuBlend.
• SynconGreenandCompositesyncsignalsarenotsupported.
• Signalsotherthanthosespeciedinthetableabovemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Ifthisshouldhappen,changetherefresh
rateorresolutiononyourPC.RefertoDisplayPropertieshelpsectionofyourPCforprocedures.
HDMI
Signal Resolution
(dots) AspectRatio RefreshRate
(Hz)
VGA 640 × 480 4:3 60
SVGA 800 × 600 4:3 60
XGA 1024 × 768 *14:3 60
WXGA 1280 × 768 *215:9 60
1280 ×800 *216:10 60
1366 × 768 16:9 60
Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4:3 60
SXGA 1280 ×1024 5:4 60
SXGA+ 1400 ×1050 4:3 60
WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16:10 60
WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16:9 60
WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16:10 60
WUXGA 1920 × 1200 16:10 60 *6
HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16:9 50/60
HDTV(720p) 1280 × 720 16:9 50/60
SDTV(480p) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576p) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3/16:9 60
SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3/16:9 50
215
9. Appendix
❻ PC Control Codes and Cable Connection
PC Control Codes
Function Code Data
POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H
POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H
INPUT SELECT HDMI1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1AH 22H
INPUT SELECT HDMI2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1BH 23H
INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H
INPUT SELECT VIEWER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1FH 27H
INPUT SELECT NETWORK 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H
INPUT SELECT USB DISPLAY 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 22H 2AH
PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H
SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H
SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H
NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.
Cable Connection
CommunicationProtocol
Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bps
Data length ��������������������������������������8 bits
Parity �����������������������������������������������No parity
Stop bit ��������������������������������������������One bit
X on/off ��������������������������������������������None
Communications procedure �������������Full duplex
NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)
NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.
NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.
NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.
15243
67 98
To GND of PC
To RxD of PC
To TxD of PC
To RTS of PC
To CTS of PC
216
9. Appendix
No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the
projector�
Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC
first, then start the PC�
Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�
• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-
naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalong
withoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplay
onoroff.
No image (blue or black background, no display)�
Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector
A message appears on the screen�
( _____________________________________________ )
The source connected to the projector is active and available�
Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or
the contrast�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
❼ Troubleshooting Check List
Beforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsoby
referringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblem
moreefciently.
*Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.
Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)
Power
No power (POWER indicator does not light blue) See also “Status
Indicator (STATUS)”�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Lamp cover is installed correctly �
Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after
lamp replacement�
No power even though you press and hold the POWER but-
ton�
Shut down during operation�
Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�
Lamp cover is installed correctly �
[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO
POWER OFF] function)�
[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER]
function)�
Video and Audio
Image is too dark�
Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness
and/or the contrast�
Image is distorted�
Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you
carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�
Parts of the image are lost�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�
Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a
computer signal�
Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the
projector�
Some pixels are lost�
Image is flickering�
Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST
button�
Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the
projector’s menu�
Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�
Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from
[HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�
Image appears blurry or out of focus�
Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution
on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�
No sound�
Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the
projector�
Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level�
AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models
with the AUDIO OUT connector)�
Other
Remote control does not work�
No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the
remote control�
Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the
infrared remote controls�
Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)
[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in
the menu�
Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button
for a minimum of 10 seconds�
217
9. Appendix
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used
Projector
Model number:
Serial No�:
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Eco Mode: OFF AUTO ECO
NORMAL ECO
Information on input signal:
Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHz
Vertical synch frequency [ ] Hz
Synch polarity H (+) (−)
V (+) (−)
Synch type Separate Composite
Sync on Green
STATUS Indicator:
Steady light Orange Green
Flashing light [ ]] cycles
Remote control model number:
Signalcable
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable?
Model number: Length: inch/m
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Switcher
Model number:
Adapter
Model number:
Installationenvironment
Screen size: inch
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Wide angle High contrast
Throw distance: feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Connected directly to wall outlet
Connected to power cord extender or other (the
number of connected equipment______________)
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number
of connected equipment______________)
Computer
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop
Native resolution:
Refresh rate:
Video adapter:
Other:
Videoequipment
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
Manufacturer:
Model number:
Projector PC
DVD player
218
9. Appendix
❽ REGISTER YOUR PROJECTOR! (for residents in the United
States, Canada, and Mexico)
Pleasetaketimetoregisteryournewprojector.ThiswillactivateyourlimitedpartsandlaborwarrantyandInstaCare
serviceprogram.
Visitourwebsiteatwww.necdisplay.com,clickonsupportcenter/registerproductandsubmityourcompletedform
online.
Uponreceipt,wewillsendaconrmationletterwithallthedetailsyouwillneedtotakeadvantageoffast,reliable
warrantyandserviceprogramsfromtheindustryleader,NECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.
©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2013 7N951901

Navigation menu